US20130122053A1 - Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth - Google Patents

Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20130122053A1
US20130122053A1 US13/625,527 US201213625527A US2013122053A1 US 20130122053 A1 US20130122053 A1 US 20130122053A1 US 201213625527 A US201213625527 A US 201213625527A US 2013122053 A1 US2013122053 A1 US 2013122053A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
bone
amino
substituted
cartilage
cells
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US13/625,527
Inventor
Michael B. Sporn
Karen T. Liby
Tadashi Honda
Gregory Mundy
Ross Garrett
Hari Reddi
Gordon W. Gribble
Takahiro Niikura
Nanjoo Suh
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Dartmouth College
University of California
Rutgers State University of New Jersey
OsteoScreen Inc
Original Assignee
Dartmouth College
University of California
Rutgers State University of New Jersey
OsteoScreen Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Dartmouth College, University of California, Rutgers State University of New Jersey, OsteoScreen Inc filed Critical Dartmouth College
Priority to US13/625,527 priority Critical patent/US20130122053A1/en
Assigned to TRUSTEES OF DARTMOUTH COLLEGE reassignment TRUSTEES OF DARTMOUTH COLLEGE ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: LIBY, KAREN T., SPORN, MICHAEL B., GRIBBLE, GORDON, HONDA, TADASHI
Assigned to OSTEOSCREEN INC. reassignment OSTEOSCREEN INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MUNDY, GREGORY, GARRETT, ROSS
Assigned to THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA reassignment THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: NIIKURA, TAKAHIRO, REDDI, HARI
Publication of US20130122053A1 publication Critical patent/US20130122053A1/en
Assigned to RUTGERS, THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF NEW JERSEY reassignment RUTGERS, THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF NEW JERSEY ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SUH, NANJOO
Assigned to NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH - DIRECTOR DEITR reassignment NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH - DIRECTOR DEITR CONFIRMATORY LICENSE (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: TRUSTEES OF DARTMOUTH COLLEGE
Assigned to NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT reassignment NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT CONFIRMATORY LICENSE (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: DARTMOUTH COLLEGE
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/41641,3-Diazoles
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/21Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates
    • A61K31/26Cyanate or isocyanate esters; Thiocyanate or isothiocyanate esters
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/275Nitriles; Isonitriles
    • A61K31/277Nitriles; Isonitriles having a ring, e.g. verapamil
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K35/32Bones; Osteocytes; Osteoblasts; Tendons; Tenocytes; Teeth; Odontoblasts; Cartilage; Chondrocytes; Synovial membrane
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/18Growth factors; Growth regulators
    • A61K38/1841Transforming growth factor [TGF]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N5/00Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, e.g. cell lines; Tissues; Cultivation or maintenance thereof; Culture media therefor
    • C12N5/06Animal cells or tissues; Human cells or tissues
    • C12N5/0602Vertebrate cells
    • C12N5/0652Cells of skeletal and connective tissues; Mesenchyme
    • C12N5/0655Chondrocytes; Cartilage
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2501/00Active agents used in cell culture processes, e.g. differentation
    • C12N2501/999Small molecules not provided for elsewhere
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02ATECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A50/00TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE in human health protection, e.g. against extreme weather
    • Y02A50/30Against vector-borne diseases, e.g. mosquito-borne, fly-borne, tick-borne or waterborne diseases whose impact is exacerbated by climate change

Definitions

  • the present invention relates generally to the fields of biology and medicine. More particularly, it concerns compositions and methods for promoting bone and cartilage growth and repair.
  • cytokines/growth factors cytokines/growth factors
  • ECM extracellular matrix
  • An autograft is tissue transplanted from one site to another in the patient, and thus benefits from the absence of an immune response.
  • using an autograft requires a second surgical site, increasing the risk of infection.
  • bone for grafting comes from a limited number of sites, e.g., the fibula, ribs and iliac crest.
  • An allograft is tissue taken from a different organism of the same species, and a xenograft from an organism of a different species.
  • Articular cartilage is also recalcitrant to regeneration.
  • Articular cartilage has discrete zone of cells including superficial zone, middle zone, and deep zone.
  • the superficial zone chondrocytes secrete superficial protein (SZP) which is encoded by the gene PRG4, homologous to lubricin, and functions as a lubricant in articular joints.
  • SZP superficial protein
  • PRG4 The superficial zone chondrocytes secrete superficial protein (SZP) which is encoded by the gene PRG4, homologous to lubricin, and functions as a lubricant in articular joints.
  • SZP superficial protein
  • PRG4 central lubricin
  • CACP camptodactyly-arthropathy-coxa-vara-pericarditis syndrome
  • TGF- ⁇ Transforming growth factor- ⁇
  • Methods are needed to module TGF- ⁇ /Smad signaling in articular chondrocytes in order to provide improved treatments for the repair and/or regeneration of articular cartilage.
  • the present invention provides improved methods of treatment for bone or cartilage disease or trauma. These methods include the repair or replacement bone or cartilage. The methods are provide treatment for diseases resulting in bone or cartilage degeneration or decay.
  • a method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell comprising: (a) providing a bone- or cartilage-producing cell or precursor thereof; (b) contacting said cell with a compound having the structure Q:
  • R 1 is cyano or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C 1 -C 15 -alkyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyl, C 7 -C 15 -aralkyl, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkyl, or C 1 -C 15 -acyl
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are each independently —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C 1 -C 15 -alkyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyl, C 6 -C 15 -aryl, C 7 -C 15 -aralkyl, C 1 -C 15 -heteroaryl, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkyl, C 1 -C 15 -acyl, C 1 -C 15
  • R 6 is hydrogen
  • R 7 is H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C 1 -C 15 -alkyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyl, C 7 -C 15 -aralkyl, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkyl, C 1 -C 15 -acyl, C 1 -C 15 -alkoxy, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyloxy, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyloxy, C 6 -C 15 -aryloxy, C 7 -C 15 -aralkoxy, C 1 -C 15 -heteroaryloxy, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkoxy, C 1 -C 15 -acyloxy, C 1 -C 15 -alkylamino, C 2 -C 15 -alkenylamino, C 2
  • one or more of steps (a), (b) and (c) occur in one discrete step. In other embodiments, one or more of steps (a), (b) and (c) occurs in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps.
  • the cell may also be cultured prior to contacting. In certain of these embodiments, the cartilage-producing cell is a chondrocyte.
  • the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell further comprises incubating the cell with a growth factor.
  • the growth factor is TGF- ⁇ 1, TGF- ⁇ 2, TGF- ⁇ 1.2, VEGF, insulin-like growth factor I or II, BMP2, BMP4, or BMP7.
  • the growth factor is parathyroid hormone, calcitonin, interleukin-6, or interleukin-11. In certain embodiments, this incubation step can occur either before, after, or at the same time as steps a and b.
  • the incubation step may occur before, after or simultaneously with any, or all of, steps (a), (b), (c), or any additional step employed.
  • the incubation step occurs after steps (a), (b), and (c). In other embodiments it occurs before either steps (a), (b) or (c). In other embodiments, the incubation step occurs simultaneously with step (b).
  • steps (a), (b), (c) and the incubation occurs in one discrete step. In other embodiments, steps (a), (b), (c) and/or the incubation occur in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps.
  • the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell further comprises purifying the cell or precursor.
  • the purifying step occurs after steps (a), (b), and (c). In other embodiments it occurs before either steps (a), (b) or (c). In other embodiments, the purifying step occurs simultaneously with step (b). In some embodiments, steps (a), (b), (c) and the purifying occurs in one discrete step. In other embodiments, steps (a), (b), (c) and/or the purifying occur in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps.
  • the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell further comprises implanting said cell in vivo after step (b) and/or step (c). In certain embodiments, the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell results in the formation of bone by said cell. In some embodiments, the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell results in the formation of cartilage by said cell.
  • a method of providing bone tissue to a mammal comprising: (a) providing a bone- or cartilage-producing cell or precursor thereof; (b) contacting said cell with a compound having the structure Q; (c) culturing the cell to form bone and/or cartilage; and (d) implanting said bone and/or cartilage to said subject.
  • steps (a), (b), (c) and (d) occur in one discrete step.
  • steps (a), (b), (c) and (d) occurs in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps.
  • the cell may also be cultured prior to contacting.
  • the bone and/or cartilage formed may be part of a three-dimensional matrix.
  • the three-dimensional matrix is one or more of alginate gels, collagen gels, or fibrin gels.
  • the three-dimensional matrix comprises one or more of polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid or PGLA.
  • the three-dimensional matrix comprises one or more of hydroxyapatite or other apatitic compounds, devitalized animal bone, devitalized human bone, or porous ceramic structures.
  • the implantation is made in conjunction with orthopedic surgery and/or orthopedic devices, such as hip implants, knee implants, or spinal fusions.
  • the implantation may be made in conjunction with oral surgery and/or dental implants.
  • the implantation may be made in conjunction with plastic surgery.
  • the implantation may be in conjunction with periodontal repairs.
  • the implantation may be into bone-forming tissue or a bone-repair site. In some embodiments, the implantation is into a wound. In other embodiments, the mammal has a bone disease such as cancer bone disease, localized osteolysis due to cancer and to myeloma, degenerative cartilage conditions, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis, Vitamin D deficiency, Osteotitis deformans, or Von Recklinghausen's Disease.
  • a bone disease such as cancer bone disease, localized osteolysis due to cancer and to myeloma, degenerative cartilage conditions, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis, Vitamin D deficiency, Osteotitis deformans, or Von Recklinghausen's Disease.
  • a method for producing bone ex vivo comprising: (a) providing bone- or cartilage-producing cell or precursor thereof; (b) contacting said cell with a compound having the structure Q; (c) culturing the cell to form bone and/or cartilage.
  • steps (a), (b) and (c) occur in one discrete step.
  • steps (a), (b) and (c) occurs in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps.
  • the cell may also be cultured prior to contacting.
  • the bone and/or cartilage formed may be part of a three-dimensional matrix.
  • a method of repairing bone or cartilage damage in a subject comprising administering to said subject a compound having the structure Q.
  • the compound is administered to a wound or bone disease site.
  • the bone disease may be cancer bone disease, localized osteolysis due to cancer and to myeloma, degenerative cartilage conditions, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis, Vitamin D deficiency, Osteotitis deformans, or Von Recklinghausen's Disease.
  • the wound may be a fracture.
  • bone is formed as part of the method.
  • cartilage is formed as part of the method.
  • the compound is a synthetic triterpenoid.
  • the synthetic triterpenoid has the structure:
  • R 2 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C 1 -C 15 -alkyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyl, C 6 -C 15 -aryl, C 7 -C 15 -aralkyl, C 1 -C 15 -heteroaryl, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkyl, C 1 -C 15 -acyl, C 1 -C 15 -alkoxy, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyloxy, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyloxy, C 6 -C 15 -aryloxy, C 7 -C 15 -aralkoxy, C 1 -C 15 -heteroaryloxy, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkoxy, C 1 -C 15 -acyloxy, C 1 -C 15 -alkyl
  • the synthetic triterpenoid may be defined as
  • Y is —H, hydroxy, amino, halo, or a substituted of unsubstituted version of C 1 -C 14 -alkoxy, C 2 -C 14 -alkenyloxy, C 2 -C 14 -alkynyloxy, C 6 -C 14 -aryloxy, C 7 -C 14 -aralkoxy, C 1 -C 14 -heteroaryloxy, C 2 -C 14 -heteroaralkoxy, C 1 -C 14 -acyloxy, C 1 -C 14 -alkylamino, C 2 -C 14 -alkenylamino, C 2 -C 14 -alkynylamino, C 6 -C 14 -arylamino, C 7 -C 14 -aralkylamino, C 1 -C 14 -heteroarylamino, C 2 -C 14 -heteroaralkylamino, C 1 -C 14 -al
  • Y is hydroxy, methoxy, ethyl-amino, or
  • the compound is a tricyclic bis-enone (TBE).
  • TBE tricyclic bis-enone
  • the TBE is further defined as
  • the TBE has the structure:
  • the cell or precursor is of human origin. In other embodiments, the cell or precursor is of bovine, equine, canine, feline, murine, rat or chick origin.
  • FIGS. 1 , 4 , 7 and 10 New bone growth following treatment with varying concentrations of drug. Bone formation was measured in vitro at 7 days at concentrations of 0, 40, 200 and 100 nM for each of TP-151F ( FIG. 1 ), TP-155C ( FIG. 4 ), TP-235H ( FIG. 7 ) and TP-319A ( FIG. 10 ). (The alphabet at the end of each compound number denotes the synthesis batch of each one.)
  • FIGS. 2 , 5 , 8 and 11 Alkaline phosphatase activity in cultures following treatment with varying concentrations of drug. AkPh activity was measured in vitro at 4 and 7 days at concentrations of 0, 40, 200 and 100 nM for each of TP-151F ( FIG. 2 ), TP-155C ( FIG. 5 ), TP-235H ( FIG. 8 ) and TP-319A ( FIG. 11 ). (The alphabet at the end of each compound number denotes the synthesis batch of each one.)
  • FIGS. 3 , 6 , 9 and 12 New cartilage growth following treatment with varying concentrations of drug. Cartilage formation was measured in vitro at 7 days at concentrations of 0, 40, 200 and 100 nM for each of TP-151F ( FIG. 3 ), TP-155C ( FIG. 6 ), TP-235H ( FIG. 9 ) and TP-319A ( FIG. 12 ). (The alphabet at the end of each compound number denotes the synthesis batch of each one.)
  • the rate of bone fractures in the United States is estimated at 6,000,000 individuals per year.
  • a significant number of fractures require medical intervention beyond simple immobilization (casting), particularly those involving trauma.
  • a major problem in such instances is the lack of proximity of the two bone ends (referred to as non-union).
  • This results in an inappropriate and prolonged repair process, which may prevent recovery.
  • the average length of time for the body to repair a fracture is 25-100 days, for moderate load-bearing, and one year for complete repair.
  • both simple fractures and medically complicated breaks would benefit from novel therapeutic modalities which accelerate and/or complete the repair process.
  • those bone diseases referred to as osteopenias
  • TGF- ⁇ /Smad signaling Numerous new synthetic triterpenoids have been studied looking at their effects on transforming growth factor (TGF)- ⁇ /Smad signaling. These agents, at nanomolar concentrations, increase the expression of TGF- ⁇ -dependent genes, such as those for plasminogen activator inhibitor I and the type II TGF- ⁇ receptor, and they synergize with TGF- ⁇ in this regard. They prolong the activation of Smad2 induced by TGF- ⁇ and markedly enhance the ability of Smad3 to activate a Smad binding element, CAGA-luciferase. In transfection assays, they reverse the inhibitory effects of Smad7. They also enhance Smad signaling in the pathways of two other members of the TGF- ⁇ superfamily, namely, activin and bone morphogenetic protein.
  • TGF transforming growth factor
  • these triterpenoids induce expression of the transcriptional coactivator p300-CBP-associated factor and synergize with TGF- ⁇ in this regard. Because of these findings, the present inventors sought to determine if these agents had any effect on bone and cartilage formation.
  • amino means —NH 2 ; the term “nitro” means —NO 2 ; the term “halo” designates —F, —Cl, —Br or —I; the term “mercapto” means —SH; the term “cyano” means —CN; the term “silyl” means —SiH 3 , and the term “hydroxy” means —OH.
  • substituted when used to modify a class of organic radicals (e.g. alkyl, aryl, acyl, etc.), means that one or more than one hydrogen atom of that radical has been replaced by a heteroatom, or a heteroatom containing group.
  • Specific substituted organic radicals are defined more fully below.
  • unsubstituted when used to modify a class of organic radicals (e.g. alkyl, aryl, acyl, etc.) means that none of the hydrogen atoms of that radical have been replaced with a heteroatom or a heteroatom containing group. Substitution of a hydrogen atom with a carbon atom, or a group consisting of only carbon and hydrogen atoms, is not sufficient to make a group substituted.
  • the group —C 6 H 4 C ⁇ CH is an example of an unsubstituted aryl group
  • —C 6 H 4 F is an example of a substituted aryl group.
  • Specific unsubstituted organic radicals are defined more fully below.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkyl refers to a radical, having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 3 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 1 -C 10 -alkyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl includes straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.
  • the groups, —CH 3 , —CH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —CH(CH 3 ) 2 , —CH(CH 2 ) 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 , —C(CH 3 ) 3 , and —CH 2 C(CH 3 ) 3 are all examples of unsubstituted alkyl groups.
  • substituted C n -alkyl refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 1 -C 10 -alkyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the following groups are all examples of substituted alkyl groups: trifluoromethyl, —CH 2 F, —CH 2 Cl, —CH 2 Br, —CH 2 OH, —CH 2 OCH 3 , —CH 2 OCH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 OCH(CH 3 ) 2 , —CH 2 OCH(CH 2 ) 2 , —CH 2 OCH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 OCOCH 3 , —CH 2 NH 2 , —CH 2 NHCH 3 , —CH 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , —CH 2 NHCH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 N(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 NHCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 NHCH(CH 3 ) 2 , —CH 2 NHCH(CH 3 ) 2 , —CH 2 NHCH(CH 2 ) 2 , —CH 2 NHCH
  • unsubstituted C n -alkenyl refers to a radical, having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having at least one carbon-carbon double bond, at total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 3 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 -alkenyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Unsubstituted alkenyl groups include: —CH ⁇ CH 2 , —CH ⁇ CHCH 3 , —CH ⁇ CHCH 2 CH 3 , —CH ⁇ CHCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —CH ⁇ CHCH(CH 3 ) 2 , —CH ⁇ CHCH(CH 2 ) 2 , —CH 2 CH ⁇ CH 2 , —CH 2 CH ⁇ CHCH 3 , —CH 2 CH ⁇ CHCH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 CH ⁇ CHCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —CH 2 CH ⁇ CHCH(CH 3 ) 2 , and —CH 2 CH ⁇ CHCH(CH 2 ) 2 .
  • substituted C n -alkenyl refers to a radical, having a single nonaromatic carbon atom as the point of attachment and at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond, but no carbon-carbon triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 2 -C 10 -alkenyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the groups, —CH ⁇ CHF, —CH ⁇ CHCl and —CH ⁇ CHBr are examples of substituted alkenyl groups.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkynyl refers to a radical, having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, at least one hydrogen atom, and no heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 -alkynyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the groups, —C ⁇ CH and —C ⁇ CCH 3 are examples of unsubstituted alkynyl groups.
  • substituted C n -alkynyl refers to a radical, having a single nonaromatic carbon atom as the point of attachment and at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon triple bond, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, and having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 2 -C 10 -alkynyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the group, —C ⁇ CSi(CH 3 ) 3 is an example of a substituted alkynyl group.
  • unsubstituted C n -aryl refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom as a point of attachment, wherein the carbon atom is part of an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 5 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 6 -C 10 -aryl has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted aryl groups include phenyl, methylphenyl, di(methyl)phenyl, —C 6 H 4 CH 2 CH 3 , —C 6 H 4 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —C 6 H 4 CH(CH 3 ) 2 , —C 6 H 4 CH(CH 2 ) 2 , —C 6 H 3 (CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , —C 6 H 4 CH ⁇ CH 2 , —C 6 H 4 CH ⁇ CHCH 3 , —C 6 H 4 C ⁇ CH, and —C 6 H 4 C ⁇ CCH 3 .
  • Aryl groups also include polycyclic fused aromatic groups such as naphthyl, quinolyl, indolyl, and the like.
  • substituted C n -aryl refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom as point of attachment, wherein the carbon atom is part of an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, further having a total of n aromatic or non-aromatic carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one nonaromatic heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 6 -C 10 -aryl has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -aralkyl refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 7 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 7 -C 10 -aralkyl has 7 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An “aralkyl” includes an alkyl substituted with an aryl group. Examples of unsubstituted aralkyls include phenylmethyl (benzyl) and phenylethyl.
  • substituted C n -aralkyl refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 7 -C 10 -aralkyl has 7 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroaryl refers to a radical, having either a single aromatic carbon atom or a single aromatic heteroatom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • an unsubstituted C 1 -C 10 -heteroaryl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • heteroaryl includes those groups derived from the compounds: pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, and the like.
  • substituted C n -heteroaryl refers to a radical, having either a single aromatic carbon atom or a single aromatic heteroatom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, and at least two heteroatoms, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the heteroatoms is not part of the one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • an substituted C 1 -C 10 -heteroaryl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroaralkyl refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least three hydrogen atoms, and at least one heteroatom, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the heteroatoms form an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • an unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 -heteroaralkyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • substituted C n -heteroaralkyl refers to a radical having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least two heteroatoms, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the heteroatoms is not part of an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 2 -C 10 -heteroaralkyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -acyl refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom of a carbonyl group as the point of attachment, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 1 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one oxygen atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 1 -C 10 -acyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the groups, —COH, —COCH 3 , —COCH 2 CH 3 , —COCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —COCH(CH 3 ) 2 , —COCH(CH 2 ) 2 , —COC 6 H 5 , —COC 6 H 4 CH 3 , —COC 6 H 4 CH 2 CH 3 , —COC 6 H 4 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —COC 6 H 4 CH(CH 3 ) 2 , —COC 6 H 4 CH(CH 2 ) 2 , and —COC 6 H 3 (CH 3 ) 2 are examples of unsubstituted acyl groups.
  • substituted C n -acyl refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom as the point of attachment, the carbon atom being part of a carbonyl group, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least one additional heteroatom in addition to the oxygen of the carbonyl group, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 1 -C 10 -acyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • substituted acyl includes carbamoyl, thiocarboxylate, and thiocarboxylic acid groups.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkoxy refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is an unsubstituted C n -alkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • Unsubstituted alkoxy groups include: —OCH 3 , —OCH 2 CH 3 , —OCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —OCH(CH 3 ) 2 , and —OCH(CH 2 ) 2 .
  • substituted C n -alkoxy refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is a substituted C n -alkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • R is a substituted C n -alkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • —OCH 2 CF 3 is a substituted alkoxy group.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkenyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is an unsubstituted C n -alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -alkenyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is a substituted C n -alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkynyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is an unsubstituted C n -alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -alkenyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is a substituted C n -alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -aryloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -aryl, as that term is defined above.
  • An example of an unsubstituted aryloxy group is —OC 6 H 5 .
  • substituted C n -aryloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -aryl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -aralkyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -aralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -aralkyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -aralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroaryloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -heteroaryloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroaralkyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -heteroaralkyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -acyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAc, in which Ac is an unsubstituted C n -acyl, as that term is defined above.
  • An unsubstituted acyloxy group includes alkylcarbonyloxy and arylcarbonyloxy groups.
  • —OCOCH 3 is an example of an unsubstituted acyloxy group.
  • substituted C n -acyloxy refers to a group, having the structure —OAc, in which Ac is a substituted C n -acyl, as that term is defined above.
  • a substituted acyloxy group includes alkoxycarbonyloxy, aryloxycarbonyloxy, carboxylate, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, and alkylthiocarbonyl groups.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 4 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of 1 nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 1 -C 10 -alkylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An alkylamino group includes dialkylamino groups.
  • An unsubstituted alkylamino group would include —NHCH 3 , —NHCH 2 CH 3 , —NHCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —NHCH(CH 3 ) 2 , —NHCH(CH 2 ) 2 , —NHCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , —NHCH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , —NHCH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 , —NHC(CH 3 ) 3 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , —N(CH 2 CH 3 ) 2 , N-pyrrolidinyl, and N-piperidinyl.
  • substituted C n -alkylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 1 -C 10 -alkylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkenylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond, a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 4 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 -alkenylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An alkenylamino group includes dialkenylamino and alkyl(alkenyl)amino groups.
  • substituted C n -alkenylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment and at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond, but no carbon-carbon triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 2 -C 10 -alkenylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkynylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, at least one hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 -alkynylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An alkynylamino group includes dialkynylamino and alkyl(alkynyl)amino groups.
  • substituted C n -alkynylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon triple bond, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, and further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 2 -C 10 -alkynylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -arylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one aromatic ring structure attached to the nitrogen atom, wherein the aromatic ring structure contains only carbon atoms, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 6 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 6 -C 10 -arylamino has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An arylamino group includes diarylamino and alkyl(aryl)amino groups.
  • substituted C n -arylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one aromatic ring structure attached to the nitrogen atom, wherein the aromatic ring structure contains only carbon atoms, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 6 -C 10 -arylamino has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -aralkylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 8 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 7 -C 10 -aralkylamino has 7 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An aralkylamino group includes diaralkylamino, alkyl(aralkyl)amino, and aryl(aralkyl)amino groups.
  • substituted C n -aralkylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 7 -C 10 -aralkylamino has 7 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroarylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the additional heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • an unsubstituted C 1 -C 10 -heteroarylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a heteroarylamino group includes alkyl(heteroaryl)amino and aryl(heteroaryl)amino groups.
  • substituted C n -heteroarylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, at least two additional heteroatoms, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the additional heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the additional heteroatoms is not part of the one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • an substituted C 1 -C 10 -heteroarylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroaralkylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least three hydrogen atoms, at least one additional heteroatom, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the additional heteroatoms form an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • an unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 -heteroaralkylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a heteroaralkylamino group includes alkyl(heteroaralkyl)amino and aryl(heteroaralkyl)amino groups.
  • substituted C n -heteroaralkylamino refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least two additional heteroatoms, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the additional heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the heteroatoms is not part of an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 2 -C 10 -heteroaralkylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • unsubstituted C n -amido refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a carbonyl group attached via its carbon atom to the nitrogen atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 1 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one oxygen atom, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 1 -C 10 -amido has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a amido group includes N-alkyl-amido, N-aryl-amido, N-aralkyl-amido, acylamino, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, and ureido groups.
  • the group, —NHCOCH 3 is an example of an unsubstituted amido group.
  • substituted C n -amido refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a carbonyl group attached via its carbon atom to the nitrogen atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n aromatic or nonaromatic carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least one additional heteroatom in addition to the oxygen of the carbonyl group, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 1 -C 10 -amido has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the group, —NHCO 2 C(CH 3 ) 3 is an example of an substituted amido group.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is an unsubstituted C n -alkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • the group, —SCH 3 is an example of an unsubstituted alkylthio group.
  • substituted C n -alkylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is a substituted C n -alkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkenylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is an unsubstituted C n -alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -alkenylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is a substituted C n -alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkynylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is an unsubstituted C n -alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -alkenylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is a substituted C n -alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -arylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -aryl, as that term is defined above.
  • the group, —SC 6 H 5 is an example of an unsubstituted arylthio group.
  • substituted C n -arylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -aryl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -aralkylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -aralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • the group, —SCH 2 C 6 H 5 is an example of an unsubstituted aralkyl group.
  • substituted C n -aralkylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -aralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroarylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -heteroarylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -heteroaralkylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted C n -heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • substituted C n -heteroaralkylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted C n -heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -acylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAc, in which Ac is an unsubstituted C n -acyl, as that term is defined above.
  • the group, —SCOCH 3 is an example of an unsubstituted acylthio group.
  • substituted C n -acylthio refers to a group, having the structure —SAc, in which Ac is a substituted C n -acyl, as that term is defined above.
  • unsubstituted C n -alkylsilyl refers to a radical, having a single silicon atom as the point of attachment, further having one, two, or three saturated carbon atoms attached to the silicon atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 5 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of 1 silicon atom, and no additional heteroatoms.
  • an unsubstituted C 1 -C 10 -alkylsilyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An alkylsilyl group includes dialkylamino groups. The groups, —Si(CH 3 ) 3 and —Si(CH 3 ) 2 C(CH 3 ) 3 , are examples of unsubstituted alkylsilyl groups.
  • substituted C n -alkylsilyl refers to a radical, having a single silicon atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one, two, or three saturated carbon atoms attached to the silicon atom, no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the silicon atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S.
  • a substituted C 1 -C 10 -alkylsilyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to salts of compounds of this invention that are substantially non-toxic to living organisms.
  • Typical pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those salts prepared by reaction of a compound of this invention with an inorganic or organic acid, or an organic base, depending on the substituents present on the compounds of the invention.
  • inorganic acids which may be used to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable salts include: hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, phosphorous acid and the like.
  • organic acids which may be used to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable salts include: aliphatic mono- and dicarboxylic acids, such as oxalic acid, carbonic acid, citric acid, succinic acid, phenyl-substituted alkanoic acids, aliphatic and aromatic sulfuric acids and the like.
  • salts prepared from inorganic or organic acids thus include hydrochloride, hydrobromide, nitrate, sulfate, pyrosulfate, bisulfate, sulfite, bisulfate, phosphate, monohydrogenphosphate, dihydrogenphosphate, metaphosphate, pyrophosphate, hydroiodide, hydrofluoride, acetate, propionate, formate, oxalate, citrate, lactate, p-toluenesulfonate, methanesulfonate, maleate, and the like.
  • Other suitable salts are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts may also be formed by reacting the agents of the invention with an organic base such as methylamine, ethylamine, ethanolamine, lysine, ornithine and the like.
  • organic base such as methylamine, ethylamine, ethanolamine, lysine, ornithine and the like.
  • Other suitable salts are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the salts formed between carboxylate or sulfonate groups found on some of the compounds of this invention and inorganic cations, such as sodium, potassium, ammonium, or calcium, or such organic cations as isopropylammonium, trimethylammonium, tetramethylammonium, and imidazolium.
  • any salt of this invention is not critical, so long as the salt, as a whole, is pharmacologically acceptable and as long as the anion or cation does not contribute undesired qualities or effects.
  • additional pharmaceutically acceptable salts are known to those skilled in the art, and may be used within the scope of the invention. Additional examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts and their methods of preparation and use are presented in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection and Use—A Handbook, by C. G. Wermuth and P. H. Stahl, Verlag Helvetica Chimica Acta, 2002, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the term “patient” is intended to include living organisms in which certain conditions as described herein can occur. Examples include humans, monkeys, cows, sheep, goats, dogs, cats, mice, rats, and transgenic species thereof.
  • the patient is a primate.
  • the primate is a human.
  • Other examples of subjects include experimental animals such as mice, rats, dogs, cats, goats, sheep, pigs, and cows.
  • the experimental animal can be an animal model for a disorder, e.g., a transgenic mouse with an Alzheimer's-type neuropathology.
  • a patient can be a human suffering from a neurodegenerative disease, such as Alzheimer's disease, or Parkinson's disease.
  • IC 50 refers to an inhibitory dose which is 50% of the maximum response obtained.
  • water soluble means that the compound dissolves in water at least to the extent of 0.010 mole/liter or is classified as soluble according to literature precedence.
  • predominantly one enantiomer means that the compound contains at least 95% of one enantiomer, or more preferably at least 98% of one enantiomer, or most preferably at least 99% of one enantiomer.
  • a compound may contain 99% (+) TBE-31 and 1% ( ⁇ ) TBE-31.
  • DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide
  • iNOS inducible nitric oxide synthase
  • COX-2 cyclooxygenase-2
  • NGF nerve growth factor
  • IBMX isobutylmethylxanthine
  • FBS fetal bovine serum
  • GPDH glycerol 3-phosphate dehydrogenase
  • RXR retinoid X receptor
  • TGF- ⁇ transforming growth factor- ⁇
  • IFN- ⁇ interferon- ⁇
  • LPS bacterial endotoxic lipopolysaccharide
  • TNF- ⁇ tumor necrosis factor- ⁇
  • IL-1 ⁇ interleukin-1 ⁇
  • GAPDH glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase
  • MTT 3-[4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl]-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide
  • TCA trichloroacetic acid.
  • Triterpenoids biosynthesized in plants by the cyclization of squalene, are used for medicinal purposes in many Asian countries; and some, like ursolic and oleanolic acids, are known to be anti-inflammatory and anti-carcinogenic (Huang et al., 1994; Nishino et al., 1988). However, the biological activity of these naturally-occurring molecules is relatively weak, and therefore the synthesis of new analogs to enhance their potency was undertaken (Honda et al., 1997; Honda et al., 1998). Subsequent research by the inventors has identified a number of synthetic compounds that have improved activity as compared to the naturally-occurring triterpenoids.
  • CDDO 2-cyano-3,12-dioxooleane-1,9(11)-dien-28-oic acid
  • related compounds e.g., CDDO-Me, TP-225, CDDO-Im
  • CDDO is the prototype for a large number of compounds in a family of agents that have been shown useful in a variety of contexts, including cancer treatment and chemoprevention.
  • CDDO-Me TP-155
  • CDDO-Im TP-235
  • CDDO-Ethylamide TP-319
  • CDDO-Me and CDDO-Im are also reported to possess capacities to modulate transforming growth factor- ⁇ (TGF- ⁇ )/Smad signaling in several types of cells (Suh et al., 2003; Minns et al., 2004; Mix et al., 2004)
  • CDDO family compounds that may be used in accordance with the present invention:
  • R 2 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C 1 -C 15 -alkyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyl, C 6 -C 15 -aryl, C 7 -C 15 -aralkyl, C 1 -C 15 -heteroaryl, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkyl, C 1 -C 15 -acyl, C 1 -C 15 -alkoxy, C 2 -C 15 -alkenyloxy, C 2 -C 15 -alkynyloxy, C 6 -C 15 -aryloxy, C 7 -C 15 -aralkoxy, C 1 -C 15 -heteroaryloxy, C 2 -C 15 -heteroaralkoxy, C 1 -C 15 -acyloxy, C 1 -C 15 -acyloxy
  • CDDO compounds corresponding to this formula can be prepared according to the methods taught by Honda et al., 2000b and Honda et al., 2002, which are both incorporated herein by reference.
  • TBEs tricyclic-bis-enone compounds
  • bis-cyano enone
  • (+)-TBE-9 having the opposite configuration to that of CDDO shows 10-times higher inhibitory activity than ( ⁇ )-TBE-9 on NO production in mouse macrophages.
  • ( ⁇ )-TBE-9 is active against MCF-7 mouse breast cancer cell lines, whilst (+)-TBE-9 is inactive (Honda et al., 2003; U.S. Patent Publication No. US2003/0232786).
  • TBE-31 The potency of the new TBEs for inhibition of NO production in RAW cells has been evaluated.
  • ( ⁇ )-TBE-31 having a C 1-8 a alkyne group is extremely potent at one nanomolar concentrations.
  • the potency is much higher than CDDO and equal to TP-225, which has the highest potency amongst semi-synthetic triterpenoids in the same assay (Honda et al., 2002).
  • TBE-31 shows extremely high potency in various in vitro and in vivo assays.
  • TBE-31 inhibits proliferation of RMPI 8226 human myeloma cells and U937 human leukemia cells.
  • TBE-31 is a potent inducer of heme oxygenase-1 in U937 cells.
  • TBE-31 is orally active in the in vivo assay of heme oxygenase-1 induction. This potency is much higher than CDDO and equal to CDDO-Im, which has the highest potency amongst semi-synthetic triterpenoids in the same assay (Liby et al., 2005).
  • TBE-31 induces CD11b expression in U937 cells. This potency is much higher than CDDO and CDDO-Im.
  • TBE-31 inhibits iNOS in RAW cells stimulated with interferon- ⁇ .
  • TBEs will promote the growth of bone and/or cartilage.
  • the TBEs which are described in the present invention, may have the capacity to modulate transforming growth factor- ⁇ (TGF- ⁇ )/Smad signaling in several types of cells.
  • Compounds 1a-1c were obtained from cyclohexanone according to the method of Honda et al. 2005, which is incorporated herein by reference. Without separation, a mixture of 1a-1c was converted to a mixture of 1b and 1c with ethereal diazomethane.
  • Compound 2 was obtained from the mixture of 1b and 1c by protection of their carbonyl groups with ethylene glycol (EG) in the presence of pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate (PPTS) in benzene (PhH) (Sterzycki, 1979), followed by LiAlH 4 reduction (53% yield from the mixture of 1a-1c).
  • EG ethylene glycol
  • PPTS pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate
  • PhH benzene
  • TBE-31 and 34 in racemic form were synthesized from I by the sequence shown in Scheme 2.
  • TMS group was removed by tetra(n-butyl)ammonium fluoride (TBAF) (Cai et al., 1995) to give TBE-31 in 71% yield (25% overall yield from I). Also, intermediate 5 was directly made in 93% yield from 4 using Corey's method (Corey et al., 1973) without going through intermediate I.
  • TBAF tetra(n-butyl)ammonium fluoride
  • Diastereomer 8 was then treated with acidic methanol and the resulting ketone (+)-1c was obtained in 91% yield. Similarly, the other diastereomer 9 gave ( ⁇ )-1c in 88% yield under the same conditions. Based on the diastereomeric purity, we concluded that (+)-1c includes 8% of ( ⁇ )-1c (enantiomeric excess (ee), 84%) and ( ⁇ )-1c includes 10% of (+)-1c (ee, 80%).
  • Enantiomer (+)-1c was treated with ethylene glycol and PPTS to give the protected ketone, which was subjected to Swern oxidation with oxalyl chloride and dimethyl sulfoxide.
  • a Wittig reaction of the resulting aldehyde with (chloromethyl) triphenylphosphonium chloride afforded the alkenyl chloride (+)-4 in 65% yield.
  • Treatment of (+)-4 with methyl lithium and quenching of the resulting anion by TMSCl gave the TMS protected acetylene.
  • Deprotection of the ketal group was followed by a chromium mediated allylic oxidation with t-butyl hydroperoxide which afforded the enone.
  • Double cyanation of the enone with LDA and p-TsCN gave the dinitrile intermediate, which was oxidized by DDQ in benzene to give the desired compound ( ⁇ )-TBE-34 in 18% yield. Removal of the TMS group was achieved by treatment of ( ⁇ )-TBE-34 with TBAF to give ( ⁇ )-TBE-31 in 48% yield.
  • (+)-TBE-34 was obtained from ( ⁇ )-1c in 15% yield by the same procedure used to obtain ( ⁇ )-TBE-34 from (+)-1c. Removal of the TMS group from (+)-TBE-34 with TBAF afforded the desired (+)-TBE-31 in 37% yield.
  • TBE-31 analogs having the structure III can be synthesized from compounds having the structure II, also shown below, which is obtained from compound I using alkyl lithium (n-BuLi, MeLi and so on) and R 1 X (nucleophilic substitution).
  • TBE-34 intermediate of TBE-31
  • TBE-35, 36, 38, and 39 have been prepared in this fashion.
  • Insertion of the methyl group into the acetylene moiety was achieved by treating the intermediate I with methyl lithium and trapping the resulting anion with methyl iodide, to give 10 in 91% yield.
  • the ketal 10 was subjected to acidic conditions to give the ketone 11 in 86% yield. Allylic oxidation of 11 afforded the enone 12 (59% yield).
  • Double cyanation of 12 with LDA and p-TsCN gave the dinitrile, which was reacted with DDQ in benzene to give the desired compound TBE-35 in 48% (22% overall yield from I).
  • the aldehyde 19 was obtained by the formylation of alkyne I with dimethylformamide and boron triflouride etherate in 91% yield (Iguchi et al, 1993).
  • the Wittig reaction of aldehyde 19 with (chloromethyl) triphenylphosphonium chloride gave the alkenyl chloride 20 in 76% yield.
  • Treatment of 20 with methyl lithium and quenching of the resulting anion with TMSCl yielded the TMS protected alkyne.
  • Compound 24 can be synthesized by treatment of acetylide of I with commercially available Br(CH 2 ) 2 NHBoc, followed by deketalization and subsequent protection with Boc 2 O.
  • Compound 25 can be obtained from 24 by the same sequence (allylic oxidation, double cyanation, and DDQ oxidation) as for other TBEs, followed by deprotection with HCl.
  • Sonogashira coupling of acetylene with aryl halide and/or vinyl halide using palladium complex (e.g. PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 ) and CuI is a very useful reaction for the synthesis of various acetylene derivatives (Sonogashira et al., 1975).
  • Compounds having structure III can be synthesized by Sonogashira coupling, as shown in Scheme 9. Also, it is possible to synthesize compounds having the structure III, directly from TBE-31. Sonogashira coupling provides a more convergent synthetic approach, allowing for the exploration of various compounds having the structure III.
  • the synthetic plan of compound 34 is shown in Scheme 12.
  • Imidazole hydrochloride 34 is expected to be water-soluble.
  • Compounds 30 was synthesized in 73% yield from I by Sonogashira coupling using iodo-SEM-imidazole (Paul et al. 2002). Deketalization of 30 gave 31 in 70% yield. Allylic oxidation of 31 can give 32. Double cyanation of 32, followed by DDQ oxidation can afford 33.
  • the desired compound 34 can be obtained by removal of SEM group of 33.
  • Water-soluble TBE-31 analogs with amino side chains (38, 42, and so on) can be synthesized using Mannich reactions. Analogs 38 and 42 can be synthesized by the sequence shown in Schemes 13 and 14.
  • Compound 39 can be synthesized by the Mannich reaction using formaldehyde and pyrrolidine under the catalysis of CuCl.
  • Compound 42 can be obtained from 39 by the same sequence as for other TBEs.
  • Compound 48 can be synthesized by the sequence shown in Scheme 15.
  • Compound 43 can be synthesized by treatment of acetylide of I with TMSCl, followed by allylic oxidation. Cyanation of 43, followed by DDQ oxidation can afford 44. After removal of ketal of 44, 46 can be obtained from 45 by Stiles' reagent (Finkbeiner et al., 1963), followed by methylation. Addition of phenylselenyl chloride (PhSeCl), followed by oxidation/elimination with H 2 O 2 can give 47 (Liotta et al., 1981). The desired compound 48 can be prepared by treatment of 47 with K 2 CO 3 -MeOH-water (Cai et al., 1995).
  • Compound 60 shown below, which has a three carbon chain including the terminal acetylene group at C-8a (contrast with TBE-31, which has a two carbon chain) can be made using the Kowalski method (Kowalski et al., 1992), shown in Scheme 17. Ketalization of 1b can give 51. Compound 51 can be converted to 52 by the Kowalski method. Compound 54 can be obtained from 52 by LiAlH 4 reduction, followed by Swern oxidation. Compound 60 can be synthesized via intermediate VI from 54 by the same sequence as for TBE-31. Intermediate VI is a key intermediate as well as I.
  • the present invention describes methods for the ex vivo and in vivo formation of bone and cartilage using from osteogenic cells, chondrocytes, bone and cartilage precursor cells, as well as cell lines derived therefrom.
  • Osteogenic or bone precursor cells are derived from primary sources such as bone marrow or bone.
  • cells can be derived from several different species, including cells of human, bovine, equine, canine, feline and murine origin.
  • Articular chondrocytes can generally be derived from humans according to the method taught by Hidvegi et al., 2006, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Human bone precursor cells are characterized as small-sized cells that express low amounts of bone proteins (osteocalcin, osteonectin, and alkaline phosphatase) and have a low degree of internal complexity (Long et al., 1995). When stimulated to differentiate, these preosteoblast-like cells become osteoblast-like in their appearance, size, antigenic expression, and internal structure. Although these cells are normally present at very low frequencies in bone marrow, a process for isolating these cells has been described (Long et al., 1995).
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,703 further describes methods of isolating and using bone precursor cells, and is specifically incorporated herein by reference.
  • An example of a technique for isolating bone precursor cells involves the following steps. Mononuclear cells are prepared from bone marrow by separation on ficoll or other suitable equilibrium density separation techniques known to those of skill in the art. Low-density mononuclear cells are then cultured overnight culture to remove plastic-adherent cells. An enrichment step using immuno-affinity isolation involves collection of non-adherent low-density cells using anti-osteonectin (ON) and anti-osteocalcin (OC) antibodies immobilized on plastic as described (Long et al., 1995). The immune adherent cells were collected by trypsinization. Alternative enrichment steps may involve immuno-column chromatography or fluorescence-activated cell sorting. In addition to antibodies to osteonectin and osteocalcin, antibodies to alkaline phosphatase or other cell surface markers expressed on bone precursor cells can be utilized. These are described in greater detail in a following section.
  • a bone precursor cell is any cell that is capable of differentiating or expanding into an osteoblast cell.
  • a bone precursor cell of the present invention is not hematopoietic and thus does not express the pan-hematopoietic antigen CD34.
  • Preferred bone precursor cells include osteoprogenitor cells and preosteoblast cells.
  • Bone precursor cells can be further enriched by equilibrium-density centrifugation of bone marrow cells.
  • Equilibrium-density centrifugation of bone marrow cells provides low density bone marrow cells enriched in bone precursor cells.
  • equilibrium-density centrifugation can be performed before the antibody purification.
  • equilibrium-density centrifugation can be performed after the antibody purification.
  • the equilibrium-density centrifugation purification step can be performed twice: before and after the antibody purification step.
  • the population of bone precursor cells can be enriched by removing stromal cells present in bone marrow cells.
  • Removal of stromal cells can be accomplished by exposing bone marrow cells to an adherent surface, typically tissue culture plastic or glass. Stromal cells adhere to tissue culture plastic or glass while bone precursor cells do not. Stromal cells can be removed before or after the immune purification step. Preferably, stromal cells are removed prior to the immune purification step.
  • tissue culture plastic or glass is well known in the art. Tissue culture plastic and glass can be treated (e.g., silicone, nitrocellulose, nickel, etc.) to promote or inhibit cell adhesion. Treated and untreated surfaces are available commercially.
  • an enriched population of bone precursor cells is further fractionated according to size.
  • size fractionation can be accomplished by fluorescence activated flow cytometry.
  • Bone precursor cells of the present invention have average diameters of between about 8 microns and about 70 microns. Preferably, bone precursor cells have average diameters of between about 10 microns and about 20 microns.
  • Another source of bone cells for use in the present invention are primary osteoblasts.
  • An example of an isolation procedure for these cells can be found in Robey and Termaine (1985). Briefly, bone chips are obtained during orthopedic surgery. These are treated with Collagenase D for 2 hrs at 37° C., the non-adherent cells washed off, the bone pieces minced, and cultured in Ca 2+ -free media containing 10% FCS and Pen/Strep. After the cultures are confluent, the cells are collected by trypsinization and cultured in Ca 2+ -containing DMEM for 2-3 weeks. Bone-derived osteoblasts are recovered by trypsinization.
  • cell lines can be used as a starting point for ex vivo bone spheroid formation as described by the methods in the present invention.
  • Cell lines can be from a number of species, including human, bovine, equine, canine, feline and murine origin.
  • Exemplary cell lines as described in the examples included in this invention are MG-63 cells (ATCC #CRL-1427), C3/H10T1/2 cells (ATCC #CCL-226) and SAOS-2 cells (ATCC #HTB-85).
  • HOS cells ATCC# CRL-1543 and various derivatives thereof, G-292 (ATCC# CRL-1423), SJSA-1 cells (ATCC# CRL-2098), Hs 3.T cells (ATCC# CRL-7005), TE 415.T cells (ATCC# CRL-7764), TE 418.T cells (ATCC# CRL-7766), Hs 755(A).T cells (ATCC# CRL-7877), 143B cells (ATCC# CRL-8303), U-2 OS cells (ATCC# HTB-96) and T1-73 cells (ATCC# CRL-7943). These cell lines are all derived from human osteosarcomas. Similar osteosarcoma cell lines from several other species are available from ATCC.
  • Chondrocytes are the only cells found in cartilage. They produce and maintain the cartilagenous matrix. From least-to terminally-differentiated, the chondrocytic lineage is (a) colony-forming unit-fibroblast (CFU-F), (b) mesenchymal stem cell/marrow stromal cell (MSC), (c) chondrocyte, an (d) hypertrophic chondrocyte.
  • CFU-F colony-forming unit-fibroblast
  • MSC mesenchymal stem cell/marrow stromal cell
  • chondrocyte an (d) hypertrophic chondrocyte.
  • mesenchymal stem cells are commonly known as osteochondrogenic (or osteogenic, chondrogenic, osteoprogenitor, etc.) cells since a single MSC has shown the ability to differentiate into chondrocytes or osteoblasts, depending on the medium.
  • chondrocytes undergo terminal differentiation when they become hypertrophic during endochondral ossification. This last stage is characterized by major phenotypic changes in the cell. Although chondroblast is still commonly used to describe an immature chondrocyte, use of the term is discouraged, for it is technically inaccurate, since the progenitor of chondrocytes (which are mesenchymal stem cells) can also differentiate into osteoblasts.
  • Bone precursor cells such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,703, herein incorporated in its entirety by reference, are immunoreactive with bone precursor cell antibody.
  • a bone precursor cell antibody is used to enrich the population of bone precursor cells.
  • Bone precursor cell antibodies include anti-osteocalcin, anti-osteonectin, and anti-bone alkaline phosphatase. Anti-osteocalcin, anti-osteonectin, and anti-bone alkaline phosphatase were described in Shull et al. (1984).
  • a bone precursor cell antibody is conjugated to a solid substrate.
  • the solid substrate is preferably a tissue culture or petri dish.
  • the use of solid surfaces such as tissue culture plastic or glass is well known in the art. Tissue culture plastic and glass can be treated (e.g., silicone, nitrocellulose, nickel, etc.) to promote or inhibit protein adhesion. Treated and untreated surfaces are available commercially.
  • Antibody coated tissue culture dishes can be utilized to “pan” for bone precursor cells.
  • bone marrow cells containing bone precursor cells are incubated on antibody coated dishes. Bone precursor cells adhere to the antibodies while all other cells do not adhere to the dish. After incubation, the dish non-adherent cells are removed by gently washing the dish with media. Bone precursor cells were removed from the dish and further analyzed, purified or differentiated into osteoblasts.
  • a second antibody immunoreactive with a bone precursor cell antibody can be used to enrich the population of bone precursor cells.
  • the use of a secondary antibody is generally known in the art.
  • secondary antibodies are antibodies immunoreactive with the constant regions of the first antibody.
  • Preferred secondary antibodies include anti-rabbit, anti-mouse, anti-rat, anti-goat, and anti-horse and are available commercially.
  • secondary antibodies are conjugated to a solid substrate including tissue culture dish, agarose, polyacrylamide, and magnetic particles.
  • a bone precursor cell antibody is first immunoreacted to a bone precursor cell. The bone precursor cell with the attached antibody is next exposed to the secondary antibody that is conjugated to a solid substrate.
  • Enrichment of precursor cells is achieved because only cells that present a bone precursor cell antibody immunoreact with the secondary antibody.
  • a commercially available kit provides secondary antibodies conjugated to magnetic particles. In this system, bone precursor cells that present a bone precursor cell antibody are purified by exposure to a magnetic field.
  • Osteocalcin is a vitamin K-dependent bone calcium binding protein also called bone gla protein (BGP).
  • BGP bone gla protein
  • human osteocalcin is a relatively small protein composed of 49 amino acids and having a molecular weight of 5800. This protein is produced from osteoblast, and occupies about 20% of the constituent components of non-collagen protein of the bones. This protein contains gamma-carboxyglutamic acid residues and has a strong affinity for hydroxyapatite, and it is therefore presumed to have an important role in the formation of the bone matrices.
  • Osteonectin also termed BM40 or SPARC (secreted protein, acidic and rich in cysteine) is a multifunctional glycoprotein involved in tissue mineralization, cell-extracellular matrix interactions as well as angiogenesis. Non-collagenous, calcium-binding glycoprotein of developing bone. It links collagen to mineral in the bone matrix.
  • the monoclonal antibodies against precursor cells can be labeled with suitable radioactive, enzymatic, fluorescent or other labels by conventional methods and/or bound to suitable solid carriers, which will be apparent to those skilled in the art.
  • monoclonal antibodies can be used in combination with, or coupled to, an immunochemical such as fluorescein isothiocyanate, peroxidase, biotin and its analogs (e.g., iminobiotin), avidin and its analogs (streptavidin), or other such markers.
  • monoclonal antibodies can be bound or attached to certain substrates and utilized to capture osteogenic cells when tissue samples such as bone cell isolates, periosteal biopsies, or cultured cells are brought in contact with the attached monoclonal antibodies.
  • the bound cells may then be separated from the solid phase by known methods depending essentially upon the nature of the solid phase and the antibody.
  • the bound cells can be recovered and used for various therapeutic purposes such as for the regeneration of bone, etc., depending upon the various external and internal factors.
  • the present invention contemplates any method of employing monoclonal antibodies to separate normal osteogenic cell subsets from other cells such as fibroblastic or hemopoietic cells.
  • a further embodiment of the present invention is directed to a method of producing a population of normal human osteogenic cell subsets comprising the steps of providing a cell suspension of tissue containing such cells; contacting the cell suspension with monoclonal antibodies which recognize an epitope on the osteogenic cells but do not recognize an epitope on the fibroblastic or hemopoietic cells; and separating and recovering from the cell suspension the cells bound by the monoclonal antibodies.
  • Chondrocytes are cells found in cartilage. They produce and maintain the cartilaginous matrix. From least-to terminally-differentiated, the chondrocytic lineage starts with colony-forming unit-fibroblasts (CFU-F), which develop into mesenchymal stem cells/marrow stromal cells (MSC), continues to develop into chondrocytes, and then hypertrophic chondrocytes.
  • CFU-F colony-forming unit-fibroblasts
  • MSC mesenchymal stem cells
  • osteochondrogenic or osteogenic, chondrogenic, osteoprogenitor, etc.
  • differentiation of a MSC in a vascularized area yields an osteoblast
  • differentiation of a MSC in a non-vascularized area yields a chondrocyte.
  • Chondrocytes undergo terminal differentiation when they become hypertrophic, which occurs during endochondral ossification. This last stage is characterized by major phenotypic changes on the cellular level.
  • Sox9 The classic markers of the chondrocytic phenotype are Sox9, collagen II, and aggrecan (Sive et al., 2002). Sox9 is known to play a major role in chondrocyte differentiation and maintenance of the chondrocytic phenotype.
  • the product of the collagen II (Col2a1) gene is an early and practically unique marker of chondrocyte differentiation, and aggrecan is the characteristic proteoglycan produced by chondrocytes.
  • TGF- ⁇ gene superfamily The use of growth factors from the TGF- ⁇ gene superfamily to produce bone ex vivo is an important aspect of the present invention.
  • the following section details attributes of the TGF- ⁇ gene superfamily. Of particular use are growth factors that induce the formation of a bone cell spheroid, as defined in the previous section.
  • the transforming growth factor- ⁇ superfamily is a well-characterized family of proteins involved in cellular proliferation and differentiation of cells into various tissues.
  • Members of the TGF- ⁇ superfamily are generally dimeric in structure, comprising two monomeric units which are produced by proteolytic cleavage from a larger precursor protein, of which the processed monomer represents the carboxyl terminal portion.
  • the dimeric TGF- ⁇ proteins generally have molecular weights of approximately 20,000 to 35,000 and share a common cysteine pattern in the mature protein region. See, for example, Sporn et al. (1986) and the papers cited therein.
  • the TGF- ⁇ superfamily includes several subgroups beside TGF- ⁇ 1 through - ⁇ 5.
  • the TGF- ⁇ superfamily also includes proteins from other species, which have been characterized and are highly conserved compared to the mammalian TGF- ⁇ s, including Vg1 (Xenopus), (Weeks and Melton, 1987); Dpp, Screw and 60A (Drosophila), (Padgett et al., 1987; Doctor et al., 1992); and more recently identified proteins including Univin (sea urchin), Dorsalin-1 (chicken) and Radar (Zebrafish).
  • Other factors which may be effectively used in the composition include synthetic molecules or fragments of a TGF- ⁇ superfamily member which are able to bind to a TGF- ⁇ receptor molecule.
  • TGF- ⁇ The transforming growth factor- ⁇ family of proteins consists of a number of related, but functionally distinct, proteins (Barnard, 1990; Roberts and Sporn, 1990).
  • TGF- ⁇ 1 One member of the TGF- ⁇ family of proteins, TGF- ⁇ 1, is a multifunctional cytokine with both growth promoting and inhibiting activities.
  • TGF- ⁇ 1 has been found to play a role in modulating repair of vascular injuries such as restenosis lesions (Nikol et al., 1992) and atherosclerotic plaques (Kojima et al., 1991).
  • TGF- ⁇ RI type I
  • T ⁇ RII type II serine/threonine kinase receptors
  • TGF- ⁇ 1, TGF- ⁇ 2 and TGF- ⁇ 3 which are functionally closely related and share a high degree of receptor cross-reactivity have been cloned and characterized by sequence analysis. All TGF- ⁇ s are synthesized as 390 to 412 amino acid precursors that undergo proteolytic cleavage to produce the monomeric forms, which consist of the C-terminal 112 amino acids. In their mature, biologically active forms, TGF- ⁇ s are acid- and heat-stable disulfide-linked homodimers of two polypeptide chains of 112 amino acids each.
  • BMPs Bone Morphogenetic Proteins
  • BMP-2 has been shown to be able to induce the formation of new cartilage and/or bone tissue in vivo in a rat ectopic implant model, see U.S. Pat. No. 5,013,649; in mandibular defects in dogs (Toriumi et al., 1991); in femoral segmental defects in sheep (Gerhart et al., 1991).
  • Other members of the BMP family have also been shown to have osteogenic activity, including BMP-4, -6 and -7 (Wozney, 1993).
  • BMP proteins have also been shown to demonstrate inductive and/or differentiation potentiating activity on a variety of other tissues, including cartilage, tendon, ligament, neural tissue.
  • BMP-3 Vukicevic et al., 1989
  • growth factors such as basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF); glucocorticoids, such as dexamethasone (Cheng et al., 1994); and prostaglandins, such as prostaglandin E1 (Chen et al., 1991).
  • bFGF basic fibroblast growth factor
  • glucocorticoids such as dexamethasone
  • prostaglandins such as prostaglandin E1 (Chen et al., 1991).
  • ascorbic acid and its analogs such as ascorbic acid-2-phosphate (Tennenbaum et al., 1982) and glycerol phosphates, such as ⁇ -glycerophosphate (Bruder et al., 1991) are effective adjunct factors for advanced differentiation, although alone they do not induce osteogenic differentiation.
  • Inhibin A Choen et al., 1993
  • CSA chondrogenic stimulatory activity factor
  • collagenous extracellular matrix molecules including type I collagen, particularly as a gel
  • vitamin A analogs such as retinoic acid
  • IGF-I and IGF-II each have a molecular weight of about 7,500 daltons.
  • Each of IGF-I and IGF-II possesses A and B domains that are highly homologous to the corresponding domains of proinsulin. A and B domains are connected to each other by a C domain. A carboxy-terminal extension, the D domain, is present in IGF, but is not found in proinsulin.
  • Both IGF-I and IGF-II are single-chain polypeptides each with 3 disulfide bridges and have a sequence identity of 49% and 47%, respectively, to human insulin A chain and B chain.
  • IGFs Like insulin, IGFs stimulate phosphorylation of specific tyrosine residues within the cytoplasmic domain of the receptors to which they bind, as described in WO 93/98826.
  • the designation “insulin-like growth factor” was chosen to express the insulin-like effects and the insulin-like structure of these polypeptides which act as mitogens on a number of cells, as described in EP 128 733.
  • IGF-I is a 70 amino acid peptide
  • IGF-II is a 67 amino acid peptide, as described in Rinderknecht (1978a) and (1978b).
  • IGF-I and IGF-II have 62% structural homology to each other. Both have been isolated from human serum.
  • Insulin-like growth factors are also known under the class name somatomedins, and have been identified in various animal species as polypeptides that act to stimulate growth of cells in a variety of tissues and cell types, particularly during development. Growth promoting effects of somatomedins include enhancement of cell multiplication and stimulation of cartilage proliferation, stimulation of transport of amino acids, stimulation of synthesis of RNA, DNA and protein, and stimulation of incorporation of sulfate into proteoglycan and of proline into collagen. Much mammalian postnatal growth is due to stimulation of cartilage growth by somatomedins and growth in utero may also be somatomedin-dependent.
  • vascular endothelial growth factor/vascular permeability factor (VEGF/VPF).
  • This protein is an endothelial cell-specific mitogen which has been shown to be stimulated by hypoxia and required for tumor angiogenesis.
  • It is a 34-43 kDa (with the predominant species at about 45 kDa) dimeric, disulfide-linked glycoprotein synthesized and secreted by a variety of tumor and normal cells.
  • VEGF appears to play a principle role in many pathological states and processes related to neovascularization
  • the present invention calls for the use of serum-free media for growth and differentiation of the bone and cartilage cells and precursors thereof.
  • serum-free culture for the manufacture of recombinant biopharmaceuticals from mammalian cells has been thoroughly reviewed (Barnes, 1987; Barnes and Sam, 1980; Broad et al., 1991; Jayme, 1991).
  • the list of the main additives which are used as supplements for serum-free media is summarized by Barnes (1987) and Barnes & Sam (1980).
  • Most commercially available serum-free media contain a carrier protein such as albumin. The presence of carrier protein might be required for protection of the cell viability.
  • serum free culture medium can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,063,157, herein incorporated by reference.
  • the media described is for non-adherent mammalian cells comprises, in addition to the base medium, transferrin, insulin, a peptone, a ⁇ -D-xylopyranose derivative, selenite and a biological polyamine.
  • Another serum free cell growth medium for mammalian cells is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,443,546.
  • This growth medium in addition to the basic medium, contains seven ingredients.
  • European Patent Application 481,791 discloses a culture medium for CHO cells comprising water, an osmolality regulator, a buffer, an energy source, amino acids, an iron source, a growth factor and other optional components.
  • the two media exemplified contain 19 and 17 components, respectively. Other additives are disclosed below.
  • Albumin is preferably supplied in the form of bovine (BSA) or human serum albumin (HSA) in an effective amount for the growth of cells.
  • BSA bovine
  • HSA human serum albumin
  • Albumin provides a source of protein in the media.
  • Albumin is thought to act as a carrier for trace elements and essential fatty acids.
  • the albumin used in the present formulations is free of pyrogens and viruses, and when necessary, is approved regulatory agencies for infusion into human patients.
  • the HSA may be deionized using resin beads prior to use.
  • the concentration of human serum albumin is 1-8 mg/ml, more particularly 3-5 mg/ml, and specifically 4 mg/ml.
  • the albumin mentioned above could be substituted by a soluble carrier/essential fatty acid complex and a soluble carrier cholesterol complex which can effectively deliver the fatty acid and cholesterol to the cells.
  • An example of such a complex is a cyclodextrin/linoleic acid, cholesterol and oleic acid complex. This is advantageous as it would allow for the replacement of the poorly characterized albumin with a well defined molecule.
  • the use of cyclodextrin removes the need for the addition of human/animal serum albumin, thereby eliminating any trace undesired materials which the albumin would introduce into the media.
  • the use of cyclodextrin simplifies the addition of specific lipophilic nutrients to a serum-free culture.
  • the lipophilic substances which can be complexed with cyclodextrin include unsaturated fatty acids such as linoleic acid, cholesterol and oleic acid.
  • unsaturated fatty acids such as linoleic acid, cholesterol and oleic acid.
  • the linoleic acid, cholesterol and oleic acid are present in effective amounts and can be present in equal proportions such that the total amount is 0.001 to 100 ⁇ g/ml, particularly 0.1 to 10 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the preparation of such complexes is known in the art and is described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,533,637, the entire contents of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • a source of iron in an effective amount and in a form that can be utilized by the cells can be added to the media.
  • the iron can be supplied by saturating transferrin, its carrier molecule, in an effective amount.
  • the transferrin may be derived from animal sera or recombinantly synthesized. It is understood that when transferrin is derived from an animal source, it is purified to remove other animal proteins, and thus is usually at least 99% pure.
  • the transferrin concentration is usually between 80 and 500 ⁇ g/ml, in particular between 120 and 500 ⁇ g/ml, more particularly between 130 and 500 ⁇ g/ml, even more particularly between 275 and 400 ⁇ g/ml and specifically 300 ⁇ g/ml.
  • An iron salt preferably a water soluble iron salt, such as iron chloride (e.g., FeCl 3 .6H 2 O) dissolved in an aqueous solution such as an organic acid solution (e.g., citric acid) is used to supply the iron to transferrin.
  • iron chloride e.g., FeCl 3 .6H 2 O
  • organic acid solution e.g., citric acid
  • concentration of iron chloride is 0.0008 to 8 ⁇ g/ml, more particularly 0.08 to 0.8 ⁇ g/ml, and specifically 0.08 ⁇ g/ml.
  • Insulin also may be added to the media of the present invention in an effective amount.
  • insulin like growth factor such as insulin like growth factor 1 and insulin like growth factor 2 may be used in place of or in addition to insulin in an amount which provides substantially the same result as a corresponding amount of insulin.
  • insulin growth factor includes both insulin and insulin like growth factors.
  • lipids to the above essential reagents could enhance the proliferative potential of precursor cells. These components, however, are preferably not added unless they are necessary for a particular experiment or to grow a particular type of cell.
  • triglycerides and/or phospholipids may be included as additional sources of lipid.
  • a preferable source of lipid contains a mixture of neutral triglycerides of predominantly unsaturated fatty acids such as linoleic, oleic, palmitic, linolenic, and stearic acid. Such a preparation may also contain phosphatidylethanolamine and phosphatidylcholine.
  • Another source of lipid is a human plasma fraction precipitated by ethanol and preferably rendered virus free by pasteurization.
  • the media When the media is to be used to grow cells for introduction into a human patient, the media preferably does not contain ingredients such as bovine serum albumin, mammalian serum, and/or any natural proteins of human or mammalian origin (as explained above). It is preferable that recombinant or synthetic proteins, if they are available and of high quality, are used. Most preferably, the amino acid sequences of the recombinant or synthetic proteins are identical to or highly homologous with those of humans. Thus, the most preferable serum-free media formulations herein contain no animal-derived proteins and do not have even a non-detectable presence of animal protein.
  • ingredients such as bovine serum albumin, mammalian serum, and/or any natural proteins of human or mammalian origin (as explained above). It is preferable that recombinant or synthetic proteins, if they are available and of high quality, are used. Most preferably, the amino acid sequences of the recombinant or synthetic proteins are identical to or highly homologous with those of humans.
  • optional components which are not necessary are preferably not added to the medium.
  • Such optional components are described in the prior art cited above and may be selected from the group consisting of meat extract, peptone, phosphatidylcholine, ethanolamine, anti-oxidants, deoxyribonucleosides, ribonucleosides, soy bean lecithin, corticosteroids, myoinositol, monothioglycerol, and bovine or other animal serum albumin.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be administered by a variety of methods, e.g., orally or by injection (e.g. subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal, etc.).
  • the active compounds may be coated in a material to protect the compound from the action of acids and other natural conditions which may inactivate the compound. They may also be administered by continuous perfusion/infusion of a disease or wound site.
  • the therapeutic compound may be administered to a patient in an appropriate carrier, for example, liposomes, or a diluent.
  • suitable diluents include saline and aqueous buffer solutions.
  • Liposomes include water-in-oil-in-water CGF emulsions as well as conventional liposomes (Strejan et al., 1984).
  • the therapeutic compound may also be administered parenterally, intraperitoneally, intraspinally, or intracerebrally.
  • Dispersions can be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations may contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion.
  • the composition must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (such as, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars, sodium chloride, or polyalcohols such as mannitol and sorbitol, in the composition.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate or gelatin.
  • Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the therapeutic compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the therapeutic compound into a sterile carrier which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient (i.e., the therapeutic compound) plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • the therapeutic compound can be orally administered, for example, with an inert diluent or an assimilable edible carrier.
  • the therapeutic compound and other ingredients may also be enclosed in a hard or soft shell gelatin capsule, compressed into tablets, or incorporated directly into the subject's diet.
  • the therapeutic compound may be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tablets, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like.
  • the percentage of the therapeutic compound in the compositions and preparations may, of course, be varied. The amount of the therapeutic compound in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that a suitable dosage will be obtained.
  • Dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subjects to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of therapeutic compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on (a) the unique characteristics of the therapeutic compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and (b) the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such a therapeutic compound for the treatment of a selected condition in a patient.
  • Active compounds are administered at a therapeutically effective dosage sufficient to treat a condition associated with a condition in a patient.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” preferably reduces the amount of symptoms of the condition in the infected patient by at least about 20%, more preferably by at least about 40%, even more preferably by at least about 60%, and still more preferably by at least about 80% relative to untreated subjects.
  • the efficacy of a compound can be evaluated in an animal model system that may be predictive of efficacy in treating the disease in humans, such as the model systems shown in the examples and drawings.
  • the first example is the otherwise healthy individual who suffers a fracture. Often, clinical bone fracture is treated by casting to alleviate pain and allow natural repair mechanisms to repair the wound. There has been progress in the treatment of fracture in recent times, however, even without considering the various complications that may arise in treating fractured bones, any new procedures to increase bone healing in normal circumstances would be represent a great advance.
  • OI osteogenesis imperfecta
  • Bosset A second example which may benefit from new treatment methods is osteogenesis imperfecta (OI).
  • OI encompasses various inherited connective tissue diseases that involve bone and soft connective tissue fragility in humans (Byers & Steiner, 1992; Prockop, 1990). About one child per 5,000-14,000 born is affected with OI and the disease is associated with significant morbidity throughout life. A certain number of deaths also occur, resulting from the high propensity for bone fracture and the deformation of abnormal bone after fracture repair (OI types II-IV; Bonadio & Goldstein, 1993). The relevant issue here is quality of life; clearly, the lives of affected individuals would be improved by the development of new therapies designed to stimulate and strengthen the fracture repair process.
  • OI type I is a mild disorder characterized by bone fracture without deformity, blue sclerae, normal or near normal stature, and autosomal dominant inheritance (Bonadio & Goldstein, 1993). Osteopenia is associated with an increased rate of lone bone fracture upon ambulation (the fracture frequency decreases dramatically at puberty and during young adult life, but increases once again in late middle age). Hearing loss, which often begins in the second or third decade, is a feature of this disease in about half the families and can progress despite the general decline in fracture frequency. Dentinogenesis imperfecta is observed in a subset of individuals.
  • OI types II-VI represent a spectrum of more severe disorders associated with a shortened life-span.
  • OI type II the perinatal lethal form, is characterized by short stature, a soft calvarium, blue sclerae, fragile skin, a small chest, floppy appearing lower extremities (due to external rotation and abduction of the femurs), fragile tendons and ligaments, bone fracture with severe deformity, and death in the perinatal period due to respiratory insufficiency.
  • Radiographic signs of bone weakness include compression of the femurs, bowing of the tibiae, broad and beaded ribs, and calvarial thinning
  • OI type III is characterized by short stature, a triangular facies, severe scoliosis, and bone fracture with moderate deformity. Scoliosis can lead to emphysema and a shortened life-span due to respiratory insufficiency.
  • OI type IV is characterized by normal sclerae, bone fracture with mild to moderate deformity, tooth defects, and a natural history that essentially is intermediate between OI type II and OI type I.
  • OI mutations More than 150 OI mutations have been characterized since 1989 (reviewed in Byers & Steiner, 1992; Prockop, 1990). The vast majority occur in the COL1A1 and COL1A2 genes of type I collagen. Most cases of OI type I appear to result from heterozygous mutations in the COL1A1 gene that decrease collagen production but do not alter primary structure, i.e., heterozygous null mutations affect COL1A1 expression.
  • osteoporosis refers to a heterogeneous group of disorders characterized by decreased bone mass and fractures. An estimated 20-25 million people are at increased risk for fracture because of site-specific bone loss. Risk factors for osteoporosis include increasing age, gender (more females), low bone mass, early menopause, race (Caucasians), low calcium intake, reduced physical activity, genetic factors, environmental factors (including cigarette smoking and abuse of alcohol or caffeine), and deficiencies in neuromuscular control that create a propensity to fall.
  • osteoporosis is a significant health care problem.
  • osteoporosis is segregated into type I and type II.
  • Type I osteoporosis occurs predominantly in middle aged women and is associated with estrogen loss at the menopause, while osteoporosis type II is associated with advancing age.
  • Much of the morbidity and mortality associated with osteoporosis results from immobilization of elderly patients following fracture.
  • osteoarthritis Current estimations suggest that 40 million Americans of all ages are affected by osteoarthritis and that 70 to 90 percent of Americans older than 75 years have at least one involved joint. Estimates of the prevalence of osteoarthritis based on radiographic evidence range from 30 to 90 percent. Men and women are equally affected, but symptoms occur earlier and appear to be more severe in women. Common synonyms for osteoarthritis include osteoarthrosis and degenerative joint disease. Osteoarthritis is not an inevitable consequence of aging. It is an acquired degenerative process that can be managed effectively by family physicians.
  • osteoarthritis The exact etiology of osteoarthritis is unknown. Multiple factors (e.g., heredity, trauma, and obesity) interact to cause this disorder. Any event that changes the environment of the chondrocyte has the potential to cause osteoarthritis. Although usually occurring as a primary disorder, osteoarthritis can occur secondary to other processes. Although the term “osteoarthritis” is often used, “osteoarthrosis” may be more appropriate. Degenerative changes are the predominant factor contributing to disability. In joints with osteoarthritis, inflammation may be present; however, it is usually mild and involves only the periarticular tissues.
  • the pathophysiology involves a combination of mechanical, cellular, and biochemical processes. The interaction of these processes leads to changes in the composition and mechanical properties of the articular cartilage.
  • Cartilage is composed of water, collagen, and proteoglycans.
  • continual internal remodeling occurs as the chondrocytes replace macromolecules lost through degradation. This process becomes disrupted in osteoarthritis, leading to increased degenerative changes and an abnormal repair response.
  • Joint use provides physiologic stimulation through the noncellular matrix that helps direct chondrocyte synthetic activity and internal tissue remodeling. Prolonged decreased joint use leads to changes in the matrix composition, resulting in subsequent loss of tissue function. The resumption of joint use can help restore the properties of the joint toward normal.
  • the strong association between age and osteoarthritis may be best explained by age-related changes in the matrix composition and a decrease in chondrocyte function and responsiveness to stimuli. These changes can interfere with continued internal remodeling, maintenance of the tissue, and loss of cartilage. This leads to an increased risk for cartilage degradation and injury to include surface defects in the articular cartilage.
  • the abnormal repair process leads to the formation of osteophytes and subchondral cysts as the disease progresses. These changes are evident on radiographs.
  • Vitamin D intake may also affect osteoarthritis. Low dietary intake or serum levels of vitamin D are associated with increased rates of progression.
  • osteoarthritis The diagnosis of osteoarthritis is largely made by obtaining a detailed history and conducting a complete physical examination. Ancillary diagnostic tests may occasionally be necessary when the diagnosis remains uncertain.
  • the usual presenting symptom is pain involving one or only a few joints. Joint involvement is usually symmetric. Morning joint stiffness that usually resolves within 30 minutes or occurs with mild-to-moderate activity is also common. As the disease progresses, prolonged joint stiffness and joint enlargement are evident. Crepitus, or a grating sensation in the joint, is a late manifestation. Limitation of joint movement may be due to flexion contractures or mechanical obstructions.
  • Radiographs can provide objective evidence of the disease. Findings consistent with osteoarthritis include presence of joint space narrowing, osteophyte formation, pseudocyst in subchondral bone, and increased density of subchondral bone. The absence of radiographic changes, however, does not exclude the diagnosis of osteoarthritis. Many patients with radiographic changes consistent with osteoarthritis are asymptomatic or do not exhibit any disability, suggesting that the presence of radiographic changes in the absence of symptoms should not lead to the diagnosis of osteoarthritis. In large joints, radiographs can exclude other causes of joint pain.
  • Radiographs are not required for every person who presents with symptoms consistent with osteoarthritis. Patients whose clinical history or course suggests other etiologies should undergo radiographic evaluation. This includes patients with trauma, joint pain at night, progressive joint pain (without prior radiography), significant family history of inflammatory arthritis, and children younger than 18 years.
  • Treatment should be tailored to the needs of the individual patient.
  • Patient education, rehabilitation, exercise, modification of activities of daily living, pharmacotherapy, alternative medicine and surgery are all treatment modalities that should be considered.
  • Combinations of treatment modalities for symptom control are better than isolated therapy for symptom relief.
  • the proper mix of modalities and exercises is based on individualized treatment goals agreed on by the family physician and the patient.
  • Pain is the primary symptom of osteoarthritis, and multiple medications are available to relieve pain and improve function.
  • the choice of a pain-control medication must be individualized, prescribing medications with the best side effect profile first and adding other pain-control medications as indicated.
  • NSAIDs nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
  • acetaminophen in a dosage of 1 g four times daily, is considered an initial drug of choice.
  • NSAIDs and aspirin have analgesic and anti-inflammatory properties but also have adverse effects on the stomach and kidney, especially in elderly patients.
  • the cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors celecoxib (Celebrex) and rofecoxib (Vioxx) cause fewer gastrointestinal side effects and, while thought to be no more effective then other NSAIDs, can be considered for use in patients with a history of gastrointestinal bleeding or those who may be taking certain medications (e.g., warfarin [Coumadin] or oral steroids).
  • the COX-2 inhibitors have not been shown to be safer than acetaminophen. Cost should be a consideration in treatment decisions.
  • Sodium hyaluronate (Synvisc, Hyalgan) is indicated only for the treatment of patients with osteoarthritis of the knee. This treatment is an alternative to consider in patients who do not respond to NSAID therapy or who have a history of gastric ulcer disease, with some evidence suggesting symptomatic and functional improvement following a series of weekly injections.
  • Intra-articular steroid injections are another treatment option but should not, in most circumstances, be administered more than three to four times per year.
  • Results of a multicenter, randomized study demonstrated that intra-articular knee injections significantly reduced pain for up to four weeks. No functional improvement was noted compared to placebo. Results from this same study revealed that joint lavage significantly relieved pain for up to 24 weeks. The effects of steroid injection and joint lavage on pain relief were additive, but neither procedure significantly improved functional status.
  • Topical capsaicin cream should be considered for adjunctive treatment of focal joint pain.
  • Glucosamine sulfate a popular treatment for osteoarthritis, is an amino-monosaccharide and a substrate of glycosaminoglycans and proteoglycans. These are substrates of hyaluronic acid, a major component of joint fluid. Glucosamine is often taken alone or in combination with chondroitin sulfate. Results from some studies have shown glucosamine to be as effective as ibuprofen in relieving the pain of osteoarthritis. Chondroitin sulfate also has demonstrated efficacy in improving the symptoms of osteoarthritis. A full review of alternative treatment modalities is beyond the scope of this article.
  • a fourth example is related to bone reconstruction and, specifically, the ability to reconstruct defects in bone tissue that result from traumatic injury; as a consequence of cancer or cancer surgery; as a result of a birth defect; or as a result of aging.
  • the availability of new implant materials, e.g., titanium, has permitted the repair of relatively large defects. Titanium implants provide excellent temporary stability across bony defects. However, experience has shown that a lack of viable bone bridging the defect can result in exposure of the appliance, infection, structural instability and, ultimately, failure to repair the defect.
  • Autologous bone grafts are another possibility, but they have several demonstrated disadvantages in that they must be harvested from a donor site such as iliac crest or rib, they usually provide insufficient bone to completely fill the defect, and the bone that does form is sometimes prone to infection and resorption. Partially purified xenogeneic preparations are not practical for clinical use because microgram quantities are purified from kilograms of bovine bone, making large scale commercial production both costly and impractical. Allografts and demineralized bone preparations are therefore often employed.
  • Microsurgical transfers of free bone grafts with attached soft tissue and blood vessels can close bony defects with an immediate source of blood supply to the graft.
  • these techniques are time consuming, have been shown to produce a great deal of morbidity, and can only be used by specially trained individuals.
  • the bone implant is often limited in quantity and is not readily contoured.
  • Toriumi et al. 1991 have written the “Reconstructive surgeons should have at their disposal a bone substitute that would be reliable, biocompatible, easy to use, and long lasting and that would restore mandibular continuity with little associated morbidity.”
  • Either natural or synthetic polymers can be used to form the matrix, although synthetic polymers are preferred for reproducibility and controlled release kinetics.
  • Synthetic polymers that can be used include bioerodible polymers such as poly(lactide) (PLA), poly(glycolic acid) (PGA), poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (PLGA), and other poly(alpha-hydroxy acids), poly(caprolactone), polycarbonates, polyamides, polyanhydrides, polyamino acids, polyortho esters, polyacetals, polycyanoacrylates and degradable polyurethanes, and non-erodible polymers such as polyacrylates, ethylene-vinyl acetate polymers and other acyl substituted cellulose acetates and derivatives thereof, non-erodible polyurethanes, polystyrenes, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl fluoride, poly(vinyl imidazole), chlorosulphonated polyolifins, polyethylene oxide, poly
  • non-degradable materials can be used to form the matrix or a portion of the matrix, they are not preferred.
  • natural polymers include proteins such as albumin, fibrin or fibrinogen, collagen, synthetic polyamino acids, and prolamines, and polysaccharides such as alginate, heparin, and other naturally occurring biodegradable polymers of sugar units.
  • PDS poly(paradioxanone)
  • PLA poly(lactic acid)
  • PGA poly(glycolic acid)
  • PLAGA copolymers. Copolymerization enables modulation of the degradation time of the material. By changing the ratios of crystalline to amorphous polymers during polymerization, properties of the resulting material can be altered to suit the needs of the application.
  • These polymers, including poly(lactide-co-glycolic) acid (PLGA) have been used as polymer composites for bone replacement as reported by Elgendy et al. (1993). Substituted polyphosphazenes have been shown to support osteogenic cell growth, as reported by Laurencin et al. (1993).
  • Poly(organophosphazenes) are high molecular weight polymers containing a backbone of alternating phosphorus and nitrogen atoms.
  • polyphosphazenes each derived from the same precursor polymer, poly(dichlorophosphazene).
  • the chlorine-substituted species can be modified by replacement of the chlorine atoms by different organic nucleophiles such as o-methylphenoxide along with amino acids.
  • the physical and chemical properties of the polymer can be altered by adding various ratios of hydrolytic sensitive side chains such as ethyl glycinate, as described by Wade et al. (1978) and Allcock and Fuller (1981). This will affect the degradation of the polymer as an implantable and biodegradable material as well as vary the support of osteogenic cells for bone and tissue implants, as shown by Laruencin et al. (1993).
  • PLA, PGA and PLA/PGA copolymers are particularly useful for forming the biodegradable matrices.
  • PLA polymers are usually prepared from the cyclic esters of lactic acids. Both L(+) and D( ⁇ ) forms of lactic acid can be used to prepare the PLA polymers, as well as the optically inactive DL-lactic acid mixture of D( ⁇ ) and L(+) lactic acids.
  • Methods of preparing polylactides are well documented in the patent literature. The following U.S. patents, the teachings of which are hereby incorporated by reference, describe in detail suitable polylactides, their properties and their preparation: U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • PGA is the homopolymer of glycolic acid (hydroxyacetic acid).
  • glycolic acid hydroxyacetic acid
  • glycolic acid is initially reacted with itself to form the cyclic ester glycolide, which in the presence of heat and a catalyst is converted to a high molecular weight linear-chain polymer.
  • PGA polymers and their properties are described in more detail in “Cyanamid Research Develops World's First Synthetic Absorbable Suture,” Chemistry and Industry, 905 (1970).
  • the erosion of the matrix is related to the molecular weights of PLA, PGA or PLA/PGA.
  • Poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (50:50) degrades in about six weeks following implantation.
  • All polymers for use in the matrix must meet the mechanical and biochemical parameters necessary to provide adequate support for the cells with subsequent growth and proliferation.
  • the polymers can be characterized with respect to mechanical properties such as tensile strength using an Instron tester, for polymer molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC), glass transition temperature by differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) and bond structure by infrared (IR) spectroscopy, with respect to toxicology by initial screening tests involving Ames assays and in vitro teratogenicity assays, and implantation studies in animals for immunogenicity, inflammation, release and degradation studies.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • DSC differential scanning calorimetry
  • IR infrared
  • Polymers are particularly useful in forming fibrous or sponge type matrices for implantation. Polymers can also be used to form hydrogels in which the cells are suspended and then implanted.
  • hydroxyapatite or a similar ceramic formed of tricalcium phosphate (TCP) or calcium phosphate (CaPO 4 ).
  • TCP tricalcium phosphate
  • CaPO 4 calcium phosphate
  • Synthetic calcium hydroxyapatite is formed in the laboratory either as pure Ca 10 (PO 4 ) 6 (OH) 2 or hydroxyapatite that is impure, containing other ions such as carbonate, fluoride, chloride for example, or crystals deficient in calcium or crystals in which calcium is partly or completely replaced by other ions such as barium, strontium and lead.
  • ions such as carbonate, fluoride, chloride for example
  • none of the geological and biological apatites are “pure” hydroxyapatite since they contain a variety of other ions and cations and may have different ratios of calcium to phosphorous than the pure synthetic apatites.
  • the crystals of pure synthetic apatites, geological apatites and many impure synthetically produced apatites are larger and more crystalline than the biological crystals of bone, dentin, cementum and cartilage.
  • the crystals of bone, dentin and cementum are very small, irregularly shaped, very thin plates whose rough average dimensions are approximately 10 to 50 angstroms in thickness, 30 to 150 angstroms in width, and 200 to 600 angstroms in length.
  • the synthetic materials are highly diverse, as reported in the literature. For example, the characterization of four commercial apatites was reported by Pinholt et al. (1992); Marden et al. (1990) reports on a protein, biodegradable material; Pinholt et al.
  • hydroxyapatite As used herein, all of these materials are generally referred to as “hydroxyapatite.”
  • the hydroxyapatite is particles having a diameter between approximately ten and 100 microns in diameter, most preferably about 50 microns in diameter.
  • Calcium phosphate ceramics can be used as implants in the repair of bone defects because these materials are non-toxic, non-immunogenic, and are composed of calcium and phosphate ions, the main constituents of bone (Frame, 1987; Parsons et al., 1988). Both tricalcium phosphate (TCP) Ca 3 (PO 4 ) 2 and hydroxyapatite (HA) Ca 10 (PO 4 ) 6 (OH 2 ) have been widely used. Calcium phosphate implants are osteoinductive, and have the apparent ability to become directly bonded to bone. As a result, a strong bone-implant interface is created.
  • Calcium phosphate ceramics have a degree of bioresorbability which is governed by their chemistry and material structure. High density HA and TCP implants exhibit little resorption, while porous ones are more easily broken down by dissolution in body fluids and resorbed by phagocytosis. However, TCP degrades more quickly than HA structures of the same porosity in vitro. HA is relatively insoluble in aqueous environments. However, the mechanical properties of calcium phosphate ceramics make them ill-suited to serve as a structural element under load bearing circumstances. Ceramics are not preferred since they are brittle and have low resistance to impact loading.
  • Polymers that can form ionic hydrogels which are malleable can also be used to support the cells. Injecting a suspension of cells in a polymer solution may be performed to improve the reproducibility of cell seeding throughout a device, to protect the cells from shear forces or pressure induced necrosis, or to aid in defining the spatial location of cell delivery.
  • the injectable polymer may also be utilized to deliver ells and promote the formation of new tissue without the use of any other matrix.
  • the hydrogel is produced by cross-linking the ionic salt of a polymer with ions, whose strength increases with either increasing concentrations of ions or polymer.
  • the polymer solution is mixed with the cells to be implanted to form a suspension, which is then injected directly into a patient prior to polymerization of the suspension.
  • the suspension subsequently polymerizes over a short period of time due to the presence in vivo of physiological concentrations of ions such as calcium in the case where the polymer is a polysaccharide such as alginate.
  • a hydrogel is defined as a substance formed when an organic polymer (natural or synthetic) is cross-linked via covalent, ionic, or hydrogen bonds to create a three-dimensional open-lattice structure which entraps water molecules to form a gel.
  • materials which can be used to form a hydrogel include polysaccharides such as alginate, polyphosphazenes, and polyacrylates such as hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA), which are crosslinked ionically, or block copolymers such as PluronicsTM or TetronicsTM, polyethylene oxide-polypropylene glycol block copolymers which are crosslinked by temperature or pH, respectively.
  • HEMA hydroxyethyl methacrylate
  • PluronicsTM or TetronicsTM polyethylene oxide-polypropylene glycol block copolymers which are crosslinked by temperature or pH, respectively.
  • Other materials include proteins such as fibrinogin, collagen, polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone,
  • these polymers are at least partially soluble in aqueous solutions, such as water, buffered salt solutions, or aqueous alcohol solutions, that have charged side groups, or a monovalent ionic salt thereof.
  • aqueous solutions such as water, buffered salt solutions, or aqueous alcohol solutions
  • polymers with acidic side groups that can be reacted with cations are poly(phosphazenes), poly(acrylic acids), poly(methacrylic acids), copolymers of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, poly(vinyl acetate), and sulfonated polymers, such as sulfonated polystyrene.
  • Copolymers having acidic side groups formed by reaction of acrylic or methacrylic acid and vinyl ether monomers or polymers can also be used.
  • Examples of acidic groups are carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, halogenated (preferably fluorinated) alcohol groups, phenolic OH groups, and acidic OH groups.
  • Examples of polymers with basic side groups that can be reacted with anions are poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinyl pyridine), poly(vinyl imidazole), and some imino substituted polyphosphazenes.
  • the ammonium or quaternary salt of the polymers can also be formed from the backbone nitrogens or pendant imino groups.
  • Examples of basic side groups are amino and imino groups.
  • Alginate can be ionically cross-linked with divalent cations, in water, at room temperature, to form a hydrogel matrix. Due to these mild conditions, alginate has been the most commonly used polymer for hybridoma cell encapsulation, as described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,352,883. Described therein is an aqueous solution containing the biological materials to be encapsulated is suspended in a solution of a water soluble polymer, the suspension is formed into droplets which are configured into discrete microcapsules by contact with multivalent cations, then the surface of the microcapsules is crosslinked with polyamino acids to form a semipermeable membrane around the encapsulated materials.
  • the polyphosphazenes suitable for cross-linking have a majority of side chain groups which are acidic and capable of forming salt bridges with di- or trivalent cations.
  • preferred acidic side groups are carboxylic acid groups and sulfonic acid groups.
  • Hydrolyrically stable polyphosphazenes are formed of monomers having carboxylic acid side groups that are crosslinked by divalent or trivalent cations such as Ca 2+ or Al 3+ . Polymers can be synthesized that degrade by hydrolysis by incorporating monomers having imidazole, amino acid ester, or glycerol side groups.
  • Bioerodible polyphosphazenes have at least two differing types of side chains, acidic side groups capable of forming salt bridges with multivalent cations, and side groups that hydrolyze under in vivo conditions, e.g., imidazole groups, amino acid esters, glycerol and glucosyl.
  • the water soluble polymer with charged side groups is crosslinked by reacting the polymer with an aqueous solution containing multivalent ions of the opposite charge, either multivalent cations if the polymer has acidic side groups or multivalent anions if the polymer has basic side groups.
  • the preferred cations for cross-linking of the polymers with acidic side groups to form a hydrogel are divalent and trivalent cations such as copper, calcium, aluminum, magnesium, strontium, barium, and tin, although di-, tri- or tetra-functional organic cations such as alkylammonium salts can also be used.
  • Aqueous solutions of the salts of these cations are added to the polymers to form soft, highly swollen hydrogels and membranes.
  • the preferred anions for cross-linking of the polymers to form a hydrogel are divalent and trivalent anions such as low molecular weight dicarboxylic acids, for example, terepthalic acid, sulfate ions and carbonate ions. Aqueous solutions of the salts of these anions are added to the polymers to form soft, highly swollen hydrogels and membranes, as described with respect to cations.
  • polycations can be used to complex and thereby stabilize the polymer hydrogel into a semi-permeable surface membrane.
  • materials that can be used include polymers having basic reactive groups such as amine or imine groups, having a preferred molecular weight between 3,000 and 100,000, such as polyethylenimine and polylysine. These are commercially available.
  • One polycation is poly(L-lysine)
  • examples of synthetic polyamines are: polyethyleneimine, poly(vinylamine), and poly(allyl amine).
  • polysaccharide, chitosan There are also natural polycations such as the polysaccharide, chitosan.
  • Polyanions that can be used to form a semi-permeable membrane by reaction with basic surface groups on the polymer hydrogel include polymers and copolymers of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, and other derivatives of acrylic acid, polymers with pendant SO 3 H groups such as sulfonated polystyrene, and polystyrene with carboxylic acid groups.
  • Bovine calf stifle joints were dissected under aseptic conditions.
  • the superficial zone of articular cartilage of femoral condyles (approximately 100 ⁇ m thickness) was harvested using a dermatome.
  • the cartilage slices were digested with 0.2% collagenase P in culture medium.
  • Isolated chondrocytes were plated in monolayer at a density of 1 ⁇ 10 5 cells/well (approximately 2.5 ⁇ 10 4 cells/cm 2 ) in 12-well culture plates and incubated at 37° C. in a moist atmosphere of 5% carbon dioxide and 95% air.
  • Chondrocytes were cultured in D-MEM/F-12 containing 10% fetal bovine serum over night, and then the media were changed in serum-free D-MEM/F-12 supplemented with ITSL (insulin, transferrin, selenious acid, and linoleic acid). Both media contain 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 ⁇ g/ml streptomycin, 50 ⁇ g/ml ascorbate-2phosphate, and 0.1% bovine serum albumin. After changing the media with serum into the serum-free chemically defined media, various concentration of synthetic triterpenoids were added into the cell culture.
  • ITSL insulin, transferrin, selenious acid, and linoleic acid
  • Both media contain 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 ⁇ g/ml streptomycin, 50 ⁇ g/ml ascorbate-2phosphate, and 0.1% bovine serum albumin.
  • SZP accumulation into the culture medium was also quantified by ELISA using purified SZP as standard.
  • Gp1 Control Gp2—TP-151F 40 Nm
  • Gp3 TP-151F 200 nM
  • Gp4 TP-151F 1000 nM
  • Gp5 Control Gp6—TP-155C 40 nM
  • Gp7 TP-155C 200 nM
  • Gp8 TP-155C 1000 nM
  • Gp9 Control Gp10—TP-235H 40 nM
  • Gp11 TP-235H 200 nM
  • Gp12 TP-235H 1000 nM
  • Gp13 Control Gp14—TP-319A 40 nM
  • Gp15 TP-319A 200 nM
  • Gp16 TP-319A 100 nM Results were expressed as new bone formation and alkaline phosphatase in the media at 4 and 7 days.
  • FIG. 1 Significant increase in new bone formation ( FIG. 1 ) with increases in alkaline phosphatase in the calvarial culture media ( FIG. 2 ). No evidence of cartilage formation was seen in these cultures ( FIG. 3 ). This indicates this agent is capable of stimulating bone formation, however no cartilage formation was seen.
  • FIG. 4 Significant increase in new bone formation ( FIG. 4 ) with increases in alkaline phosphatase in the calvarial culture media ( FIG. 5 ). Some evidence of cartilage formation was seen in these cultures ( FIG. 3 ) however this was not significant. This indicates this agent is capable of stimulating bone formation and possibly cartilage formation.
  • FIG. 10 Some increases in new bone formation ( FIG. 10 ) and there was also dose responsive increases in alkaline phosphatase in the calvarial culture media ( FIG. 11 ). There was clear evidence increases in cartilage formation was seen in these cultures ( FIG. 12 ).
  • Recombinant human TGF- ⁇ 1 was found to up-regulate SZP synthesis in a dose-dependent manner (0.4-120 pM).
  • TP-151 and TP-155 up-regulated SZP synthesis at lower concentrations, with SZP synthesis increasing as the concentration of these two triterpenoids was increased from 0.01 to 1 nM.
  • TP-235 and TP-319 had no obvious effects in this range.
  • compositions and/or methods disclosed and claimed herein can be made and executed without undue experimentation in light of the present disclosure. While the compositions and methods of this invention have been described in terms of preferred embodiments, it will be apparent to those of skill in the art that variations may be applied to the compositions and/or methods and in the steps or in the sequence of steps of the method described herein without departing from the concept, spirit and scope of the invention. More specifically, it will be apparent that certain agents which are both chemically and physiologically related may be substituted for the agents described herein while the same or similar results would be achieved. All such similar substitutes and modifications apparent to those skilled in the art are deemed to be within the spirit, scope and concept of the invention as defined by the appended claims.

Abstract

The present invention concerns methods for stimulating the growth and repair of bone and cartilage using synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones. Examples of suitable triterpenoids include CDDO, CDDO-Me, CDDO-Im, and CDDO-Ethylamide. Examples of tricyclic-bis-enones include TBE-31 and TBE-34.

Description

  • The present application claims the benefit of priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/866,344, filed Nov. 17, 2006, the entire contents of this application being incorporated by reference.
  • The government owns rights in the present invention pursuant to grant numbers CA-078814 and CA-105294 from the National Institutes of Health.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • I. Field of the Invention
  • The present invention relates generally to the fields of biology and medicine. More particularly, it concerns compositions and methods for promoting bone and cartilage growth and repair.
  • II. Description of Related Art
  • The development of a functional tissue such as bone requires the concerted action of a number of microenvironmental signals: cytokines/growth factors, extracellular matrix (ECM) molecules, and cell:cell interactions. Moreover, these regulatory signals must be queued in the appropriate temporal and spatial order, resulting in a developmental microenvironment that facilitates three-dimensional growth. The skeletal system is no exception to such requirements. It is well understood that a number of cytokines/growth factors, such as TGF-β1 family members, modulate bone formation, and that ECM molecules like osteonectin, osteocalcin, and Type I and II collagen, etc., are important in both osteogenesis and chondrogenesis.
  • Current methods for the repair of bone defects include grafts of organic and synthetic construction. Three types of organic grafts are commonly used: autografts, allografts, and xenografts. An autograft is tissue transplanted from one site to another in the patient, and thus benefits from the absence of an immune response. However, using an autograft requires a second surgical site, increasing the risk of infection. Further, bone for grafting comes from a limited number of sites, e.g., the fibula, ribs and iliac crest. An allograft is tissue taken from a different organism of the same species, and a xenograft from an organism of a different species. These tissues are readily available in larger quantities than autografts, but genetic differences between the donor and recipient may lead to rejection of the graft. All have advantages and disadvantages, yet none provides an ideal replacement for missing bone. Thus, there exists a need for improved to repair and/or replace bone in subjects suffering from bone disease or trauma.
  • Articular cartilage is also recalcitrant to regeneration. Articular cartilage has discrete zone of cells including superficial zone, middle zone, and deep zone. The superficial zone chondrocytes secrete superficial protein (SZP) which is encoded by the gene PRG4, homologous to lubricin, and functions as a lubricant in articular joints. In contrast, the chondrocytes in the middle or deep zones of cartilage exhibit little capacity for SZP synthesis. Moreover, camptodactyly-arthropathy-coxa-vara-pericarditis syndrome (CACP) is known to be caused by mutations in the PRG4 gene which encodes SZP. Understanding of the regulators of SZP synthesis is important for investigating disease, homeostasis of articular joint, and tissue engineering of functional superficial zone articular cartilage. Transforming growth factor-β (TGF-β) is known to possess a capacity to up-regulate SZP synthesis in articular chondrocytes (Palcy et al., 1999). Methods are needed to module TGF-β/Smad signaling in articular chondrocytes in order to provide improved treatments for the repair and/or regeneration of articular cartilage.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention provides improved methods of treatment for bone or cartilage disease or trauma. These methods include the repair or replacement bone or cartilage. The methods are provide treatment for diseases resulting in bone or cartilage degeneration or decay.
  • Thus in some embodiments of the invention, there is provided a method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell comprising: (a) providing a bone- or cartilage-producing cell or precursor thereof; (b) contacting said cell with a compound having the structure Q:
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00001
  • wherein either R1 is cyano or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, or C1-C15-acyl, and R2, R3, R4, and R5 are each independently —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C6-C15-aryl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C1-C15-heteroaryl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-hetaryloxy, C2-C15-hetaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-arylamino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-hetarylamino, C2-C15-hetaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido, or
    R1 and R4 are methyl, R2 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C6-C15-aryl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C1-C15-hetero aryl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-arylamino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroarylamino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido, R3 and R5 are both replaced by a group having the structure shown below, with the bond to R3, in the structure above, attached to the carbon atom labeled “3” in the structure below, and, with the bond to R5, in the structure above, attached to the carbon atom labeled “5” in the structure:
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00002
  • and
    R6 is hydrogen, R7 is H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-arylamino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroarylamino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido; further wherein X is selected from the group consisting of —H and ═O; A, B, and C each independently signifies a single- or double-bond, provided that (1) when C is a double-bond, R4 is absent, (2) when B is a double bond, X is ═O, (3) when B is a single bond, X is —H; any ketone group shown in the above structure may replaced by its enol tautomer, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and optical isomers thereof; and (c) culturing the cell. In some embodiments, one or more of steps (a), (b) and (c) occur in one discrete step. In other embodiments, one or more of steps (a), (b) and (c) occurs in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps. Those of skill in the art will recognize that the cell may also be cultured prior to contacting. In certain of these embodiments, the cartilage-producing cell is a chondrocyte.
  • In some embodiments, the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell further comprises incubating the cell with a growth factor. In some of these embodiments, the growth factor is TGF-β1, TGF-β2, TGF-β1.2, VEGF, insulin-like growth factor I or II, BMP2, BMP4, or BMP7. In other of these embodiments, the growth factor is parathyroid hormone, calcitonin, interleukin-6, or interleukin-11. In certain embodiments, this incubation step can occur either before, after, or at the same time as steps a and b. Those of skill in the art will recognize that the incubation step may occur before, after or simultaneously with any, or all of, steps (a), (b), (c), or any additional step employed. For example, in some of these embodiments, the incubation step occurs after steps (a), (b), and (c). In other embodiments it occurs before either steps (a), (b) or (c). In other embodiments, the incubation step occurs simultaneously with step (b). In some embodiments, steps (a), (b), (c) and the incubation occurs in one discrete step. In other embodiments, steps (a), (b), (c) and/or the incubation occur in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps.
  • In certain embodiments, the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell further comprises purifying the cell or precursor. For example, in some of these embodiments, the purifying step occurs after steps (a), (b), and (c). In other embodiments it occurs before either steps (a), (b) or (c). In other embodiments, the purifying step occurs simultaneously with step (b). In some embodiments, steps (a), (b), (c) and the purifying occurs in one discrete step. In other embodiments, steps (a), (b), (c) and/or the purifying occur in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps.
  • In some embodiments, the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell further comprises implanting said cell in vivo after step (b) and/or step (c). In certain embodiments, the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell results in the formation of bone by said cell. In some embodiments, the method for stimulating a bone- and/or cartilage-forming cell results in the formation of cartilage by said cell.
  • In other embodiments of the invention, there is provided a method of providing bone tissue to a mammal comprising: (a) providing a bone- or cartilage-producing cell or precursor thereof; (b) contacting said cell with a compound having the structure Q; (c) culturing the cell to form bone and/or cartilage; and (d) implanting said bone and/or cartilage to said subject. In some embodiments, one or more of steps (a), (b), (c) and (d) occur in one discrete step. In other embodiments, one or more of steps (a), (b), (c) and (d) occurs in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps. Those of skill in the art will recognize that the cell may also be cultured prior to contacting.
  • In certain embodiments, the bone and/or cartilage formed may be part of a three-dimensional matrix. In certain of these embodiments, the three-dimensional matrix is one or more of alginate gels, collagen gels, or fibrin gels. In other of these embodiments, the three-dimensional matrix comprises one or more of polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid or PGLA. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional matrix comprises one or more of hydroxyapatite or other apatitic compounds, devitalized animal bone, devitalized human bone, or porous ceramic structures.
  • In some embodiments, the implantation is made in conjunction with orthopedic surgery and/or orthopedic devices, such as hip implants, knee implants, or spinal fusions. In other embodiments, the implantation may be made in conjunction with oral surgery and/or dental implants. In still other embodiments, the implantation may be made in conjunction with plastic surgery. In some embodiments, the implantation may be in conjunction with periodontal repairs.
  • In certain embodiments, the implantation may be into bone-forming tissue or a bone-repair site. In some embodiments, the implantation is into a wound. In other embodiments, the mammal has a bone disease such as cancer bone disease, localized osteolysis due to cancer and to myeloma, degenerative cartilage conditions, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis, Vitamin D deficiency, Osteotitis deformans, or Von Recklinghausen's Disease.
  • In other embodiments of the invention, there is provided a method for producing bone ex vivo comprising: (a) providing bone- or cartilage-producing cell or precursor thereof; (b) contacting said cell with a compound having the structure Q; (c) culturing the cell to form bone and/or cartilage. In some embodiments, one or more of steps (a), (b) and (c) occur in one discrete step. In other embodiments, one or more of steps (a), (b) and (c) occurs in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete steps. Those of skill in the art will recognize that the cell may also be cultured prior to contacting. In some embodiments, the bone and/or cartilage formed may be part of a three-dimensional matrix.
  • In other embodiments of the invention, there is provided a method of repairing bone or cartilage damage in a subject comprising administering to said subject a compound having the structure Q. In some of these embodiments, the compound is administered to a wound or bone disease site. In certain embodiments, the bone disease may be cancer bone disease, localized osteolysis due to cancer and to myeloma, degenerative cartilage conditions, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis, Vitamin D deficiency, Osteotitis deformans, or Von Recklinghausen's Disease. In other of these embodiments, the wound may be a fracture. In some embodiments, bone is formed as part of the method. In certain embodiments, cartilage is formed as part of the method.
  • In some embodiments of any of the methods described above, the compound is a synthetic triterpenoid. In some of these embodiments, the synthetic triterpenoid has the structure:
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00003
  • wherein R2 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C6-C15-aryl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C1-C15-heteroaryl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-arylamino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroarylamino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido; R7 is H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-arylamino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroarylamino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido; further wherein any ketone group shown in the above structure may replaced by its enol tautomer, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and hydrates thereof.
  • In some specific embodiments, the synthetic triterpenoid may be defined as
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00004
  • wherein Y is —H, hydroxy, amino, halo, or a substituted of unsubstituted version of C1-C14-alkoxy, C2-C14-alkenyloxy, C2-C14-alkynyloxy, C6-C14-aryloxy, C7-C14-aralkoxy, C1-C14-heteroaryloxy, C2-C14-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C14-acyloxy, C1-C14-alkylamino, C2-C14-alkenylamino, C2-C14-alkynylamino, C6-C14-arylamino, C7-C14-aralkylamino, C1-C14-heteroarylamino, C2-C14-heteroaralkylamino, C1-C14-alkylthio, C6-C14-arylthio, C7-C14-aralkylthio, C1-C14-heteroarylthio, C2-C14-heteroaralkylthio, or C0-C14-silyl, and substantially free pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
  • In certain of these embodiments, Y is hydroxy, methoxy, ethyl-amino, or
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00005
  • In some embodiments of any of the methods described above, the compound is a tricyclic bis-enone (TBE). In some of these embodiments, the TBE is further defined as
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00006
  • substantially free from other optical isomers. In other of these embodiments, the TBE is further defined as
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00007
  • substantially free from other optical isomers. In still other of these embodiments, the TBE has the structure:
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00008
  • In some embodiments of any of the methods described above, the cell or precursor is of human origin. In other embodiments, the cell or precursor is of bovine, equine, canine, feline, murine, rat or chick origin.
  • It is contemplated that any method or composition described herein can be implemented with respect to any other method or composition described herein.
  • These, and other, embodiments of the invention will be better appreciated and understood when considered in conjunction with the following description and the accompanying drawings. It should be understood, however, that the following description, while indicating various embodiments of the invention and numerous specific details thereof, is given by way of illustration and not of limitation. Many substitutions, modifications, additions and/or rearrangements may be made within the scope of the invention without departing from the spirit thereof, and the invention includes all such substitutions, modifications, additions and/or rearrangements.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The following drawings form part of the present specification and are included to further demonstrate certain aspects of the present invention. The invention may be better understood by reference to one or more of these drawings in combination with the detailed description of specific embodiments presented herein.
  • FIGS. 1, 4, 7 and 10—New bone growth following treatment with varying concentrations of drug. Bone formation was measured in vitro at 7 days at concentrations of 0, 40, 200 and 100 nM for each of TP-151F (FIG. 1), TP-155C (FIG. 4), TP-235H (FIG. 7) and TP-319A (FIG. 10). (The alphabet at the end of each compound number denotes the synthesis batch of each one.)
  • FIGS. 2, 5, 8 and 11—Alkaline phosphatase activity in cultures following treatment with varying concentrations of drug. AkPh activity was measured in vitro at 4 and 7 days at concentrations of 0, 40, 200 and 100 nM for each of TP-151F (FIG. 2), TP-155C (FIG. 5), TP-235H (FIG. 8) and TP-319A (FIG. 11). (The alphabet at the end of each compound number denotes the synthesis batch of each one.)
  • FIGS. 3, 6, 9 and 12—New cartilage growth following treatment with varying concentrations of drug. Cartilage formation was measured in vitro at 7 days at concentrations of 0, 40, 200 and 100 nM for each of TP-151F (FIG. 3), TP-155C (FIG. 6), TP-235H (FIG. 9) and TP-319A (FIG. 12). (The alphabet at the end of each compound number denotes the synthesis batch of each one.)
  • DESCRIPTION OF ILLUSTRATIVE EMBODIMENTS I. The Present Invention
  • The rate of bone fractures in the United States is estimated at 6,000,000 individuals per year. When a bone is completely fractured, a significant number of fractures require medical intervention beyond simple immobilization (casting), particularly those involving trauma. A major problem in such instances is the lack of proximity of the two bone ends (referred to as non-union). This results in an inappropriate and prolonged repair process, which may prevent recovery. The average length of time for the body to repair a fracture is 25-100 days, for moderate load-bearing, and one year for complete repair. Thus, both simple fractures and medically complicated breaks would benefit from novel therapeutic modalities which accelerate and/or complete the repair process. The same is true for those bone diseases (referred to as osteopenias) which result in a thinning of the bone the primary symptom of which is an often-debilitating fracture, and other diseases in which bone strength or elasticity is compromised.
  • There is no curative treatment for lost bone mass. Likewise, there is no effective replacement or implant for non-union fractures or crush injuries of the bone. Currently, these latter types of injury utilize bovine (cow), or human cadaver bone which is chemically treated (to remove proteins) in order to prevent rejection. However, such bone implants, while mechanically important, are biologically dead (they do not contain bone-forming cells, growth factors, or other regulatory proteins). Thus, they do not greatly modulate the repair process.
  • Numerous new synthetic triterpenoids have been studied looking at their effects on transforming growth factor (TGF)-β/Smad signaling. These agents, at nanomolar concentrations, increase the expression of TGF-β-dependent genes, such as those for plasminogen activator inhibitor I and the type II TGF-β receptor, and they synergize with TGF-β in this regard. They prolong the activation of Smad2 induced by TGF-β and markedly enhance the ability of Smad3 to activate a Smad binding element, CAGA-luciferase. In transfection assays, they reverse the inhibitory effects of Smad7. They also enhance Smad signaling in the pathways of two other members of the TGF-β superfamily, namely, activin and bone morphogenetic protein. Finally, these triterpenoids induce expression of the transcriptional coactivator p300-CBP-associated factor and synergize with TGF-β in this regard. Because of these findings, the present inventors sought to determine if these agents had any effect on bone and cartilage formation.
  • As shown below in the Examples, the results revealed that all the triterpenoid compounds tested induced new bone formation, some more so than others. Some of the compounds tested also induced cartilage formation. The results also showed that the triterpenoid compounds induced elevated levels of alkaline phosphatase, which is consistent with rapid bone growth.
  • II. Definitions
  • As used herein, the term “amino” means —NH2; the term “nitro” means —NO2; the term “halo” designates —F, —Cl, —Br or —I; the term “mercapto” means —SH; the term “cyano” means —CN; the term “silyl” means —SiH3, and the term “hydroxy” means —OH.
  • The term “substituted,” when used to modify a class of organic radicals (e.g. alkyl, aryl, acyl, etc.), means that one or more than one hydrogen atom of that radical has been replaced by a heteroatom, or a heteroatom containing group. Specific substituted organic radicals are defined more fully below.
  • The term “unsubstituted,” when used to modify a class of organic radicals (e.g. alkyl, aryl, acyl, etc.) means that none of the hydrogen atoms of that radical have been replaced with a heteroatom or a heteroatom containing group. Substitution of a hydrogen atom with a carbon atom, or a group consisting of only carbon and hydrogen atoms, is not sufficient to make a group substituted. For example, the group —C6H4C≡CH is an example of an unsubstituted aryl group, while —C6H4F is an example of a substituted aryl group. Specific unsubstituted organic radicals are defined more fully below.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkyl” refers to a radical, having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 3 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C1-C10-alkyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The term “alkyl” includes straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups. The groups, —CH3, —CH2CH3, —CH2CH2CH3, —CH(CH3)2, —CH(CH2)2, —CH2CH2CH2CH3, —CH(CH3)CH2CH3, —CH2CH(CH3)2, —C(CH3)3, and —CH2C(CH3)3, are all examples of unsubstituted alkyl groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkyl” refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C1-C10-alkyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The following groups are all examples of substituted alkyl groups: trifluoromethyl, —CH2F, —CH2Cl, —CH2Br, —CH2OH, —CH2OCH3, —CH2OCH2CH3, —CH2OCH2CH2CH3, —CH2OCH(CH3)2, —CH2OCH(CH2)2, —CH2OCH2CF3, —CH2OCOCH3, —CH2NH2, —CH2NHCH3, —CH2N(CH3)2, —CH2NHCH2CH3, —CH2N(CH3)CH2CH3, —CH2NHCH2CH2CH3, —CH2NHCH(CH3)2, —CH2NHCH(CH2)2, —CH2N(CH2CH3)2, —CH2CH2F, —CH2CH2Cl, —CH2CH2Br, —CH2CH2I, —CH2CH2OH, CH2CH2OCOCH3, —CH2CH2NH2, —CH2CH2N(CH3)2, —CH2CH2NHCH2CH3, —CH2CH2N(CH3)CH2CH3, —CH2CH2NHCH2CH2CH3, —CH2CH2NHCH(CH3)2, —CH2CH2NHCH(CH2)2, —CH2CH2N(CH2CH3)2, —CH2CH2NHCO2C(CH3)3, and —CH2Si(CH3)3.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkenyl” refers to a radical, having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having at least one carbon-carbon double bond, at total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 3 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C2-C10-alkenyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. Unsubstituted alkenyl groups include: —CH═CH2, —CH═CHCH3, —CH═CHCH2CH3, —CH═CHCH2CH2CH3, —CH═CHCH(CH3)2, —CH═CHCH(CH2)2, —CH2CH═CH2, —CH2CH═CHCH3, —CH2CH═CHCH2CH3, —CH2CH═CHCH2CH2CH3, —CH2CH═CHCH(CH3)2, and —CH2CH═CHCH(CH2)2.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkenyl” refers to a radical, having a single nonaromatic carbon atom as the point of attachment and at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond, but no carbon-carbon triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C2-C10-alkenyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. The groups, —CH═CHF, —CH═CHCl and —CH═CHBr, are examples of substituted alkenyl groups.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkynyl” refers to a radical, having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, at least one hydrogen atom, and no heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C2-C10-alkynyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. The groups, —C≡CH and —C≡CCH3, are examples of unsubstituted alkynyl groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkynyl” refers to a radical, having a single nonaromatic carbon atom as the point of attachment and at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon triple bond, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, and having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C2-C10-alkynyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. The group, —C≡CSi(CH3)3, is an example of a substituted alkynyl group.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-aryl” refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom as a point of attachment, wherein the carbon atom is part of an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 5 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C6-C10-aryl has 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of unsubstituted aryl groups include phenyl, methylphenyl, di(methyl)phenyl, —C6H4CH2CH3, —C6H4CH2CH2CH3, —C6H4CH(CH3)2, —C6H4CH(CH2)2, —C6H3(CH3)CH2CH3, —C6H4CH═CH2, —C6H4CH═CHCH3, —C6H4C≡CH, and —C6H4C≡CCH3. Aryl groups also include polycyclic fused aromatic groups such as naphthyl, quinolyl, indolyl, and the like.
  • The term “substituted Cn-aryl” refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom as point of attachment, wherein the carbon atom is part of an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, further having a total of n aromatic or non-aromatic carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one nonaromatic heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C6-C10-aryl has 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The groups, —C6H4F, —C6H4Cl, —C6H4Br, —C6H4I, —C6H4OH, —C6H4OCH3, —C6H4OCH2CH3, —C6H4OCOCH3, —C6H4OC6H5, —C6H4NH2, —C6H4NHCH3, —C6H4NHCH2CH3, —C6H4CH2Cl, —C6H4CH2Br, —C6H4CH2OH, —C6H4CH2OCOCH3, —C6H4CH2NH2, —C6H4N(CH3)2, —C6H4CH2CH2Cl, —C6H4CH2CH2OH, —C6H4CH2CH2OCOCH3, —C6H4CH2CH2NH2, —C6H4CH2CH═CH2, —C6H4CF3, —C6H4CN, —C6H4C≡CSi(CH3)3, —C6H4COH, —C6H4COCH3, —C6H4COCH2CH3, —C6H4COCH2CF3, —C6H4COC6H5, —C6H4CO2H, —C6H4CO2CH3, —C6H4CONH2, —C6H4CONHCH3, and —C6H4CON(CH3)2 are examples of substituted aryl groups.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-aralkyl” refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 7 or more hydrogen atoms, and no heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C7-C10-aralkyl has 7 to 10 carbon atoms. An “aralkyl” includes an alkyl substituted with an aryl group. Examples of unsubstituted aralkyls include phenylmethyl (benzyl) and phenylethyl.
  • The term “substituted Cn-aralkyl” refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C7-C10-aralkyl has 7 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroaryl” refers to a radical, having either a single aromatic carbon atom or a single aromatic heteroatom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, and at least one heteroatom, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, an unsubstituted C1-C10-heteroaryl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. For example, the term “heteroaryl” includes those groups derived from the compounds: pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, and the like.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroaryl” refers to a radical, having either a single aromatic carbon atom or a single aromatic heteroatom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, and at least two heteroatoms, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the heteroatoms is not part of the one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, an substituted C1-C10-heteroaryl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroaralkyl” refers to a radical, having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least three hydrogen atoms, and at least one heteroatom, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the heteroatoms form an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, an unsubstituted C2-C10-heteroaralkyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroaralkyl” refers to a radical having a single saturated carbon atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least two heteroatoms, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the heteroatoms is not part of an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C2-C10-heteroaralkyl has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-acyl” refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom of a carbonyl group as the point of attachment, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 1 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one oxygen atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C1-C10-acyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The groups, —COH, —COCH3, —COCH2CH3, —COCH2CH2CH3, —COCH(CH3)2, —COCH(CH2)2, —COC6H5, —COC6H4CH3, —COC6H4CH2CH3, —COC6H4CH2CH2CH3, —COC6H4CH(CH3)2, —COC6H4CH(CH2)2, and —COC6H3(CH3)2, are examples of unsubstituted acyl groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-acyl” refers to a radical, having a single carbon atom as the point of attachment, the carbon atom being part of a carbonyl group, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least one additional heteroatom in addition to the oxygen of the carbonyl group, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C1-C10-acyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The term substituted acyl includes carbamoyl, thiocarboxylate, and thiocarboxylic acid groups. The groups, —COCH2CF3, —CO2H, —CO2CH3, —CO2CH2CH3, —CO2CH2CH2CH3, —CO2CH(CH3)2, —CO2CH(CH2)2, —CONH2, —CONHCH3, —CONHCH2CH3, —CONHCH2CH2CH3, —CONHCH(CH3)2, —CONHCH(CH2)2, —CON(CH3)2, —CON(CH2CH3)CH3, —CON(CH2CH3)2 and —CONHCH2CF3, are examples substituted acyl groups.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkoxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is an unsubstituted Cn-alkyl, as that term is defined above. Unsubstituted alkoxy groups include: —OCH3, —OCH2CH3, —OCH2CH2CH3, —OCH(CH3)2, and —OCH(CH2)2.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkoxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is a substituted Cn-alkyl, as that term is defined above. For example, —OCH2CF3 is a substituted alkoxy group.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkenyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is an unsubstituted Cn-alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkenyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is a substituted Cn-alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkynyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is an unsubstituted Cn-alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkenyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OR, in which R is a substituted Cn-alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-aryloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-aryl, as that term is defined above. An example of an unsubstituted aryloxy group is —OC6H5.
  • The term “substituted Cn-aryloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-aryl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-aralkyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-aralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-aralkyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-aralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroaryloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroaryloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroaralkyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroaralkyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-acyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAc, in which Ac is an unsubstituted Cn-acyl, as that term is defined above. An unsubstituted acyloxy group includes alkylcarbonyloxy and arylcarbonyloxy groups. For example, —OCOCH3 is an example of an unsubstituted acyloxy group.
  • The term “substituted Cn-acyloxy” refers to a group, having the structure —OAc, in which Ac is a substituted Cn-acyl, as that term is defined above. A substituted acyloxy group includes alkoxycarbonyloxy, aryloxycarbonyloxy, carboxylate, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, and alkylthiocarbonyl groups.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 4 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of 1 nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C1-C10-alkylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. An alkylamino group includes dialkylamino groups. An unsubstituted alkylamino group would include —NHCH3, —NHCH2CH3, —NHCH2CH2CH3, —NHCH(CH3)2, —NHCH(CH2)2, —NHCH2CH2CH2CH3, —NHCH(CH3)CH2CH3, —NHCH2CH(CH3)2, —NHC(CH3)3, —N(CH3)2, —N(CH3)CH2CH3, —N(CH2CH3)2, N-pyrrolidinyl, and N-piperidinyl.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C1-C10-alkylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkenylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond, a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 4 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C2-C10-alkenylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. An alkenylamino group includes dialkenylamino and alkyl(alkenyl)amino groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkenylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment and at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bond, but no carbon-carbon triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C2-C10-alkenylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkynylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, at least one hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C2-C10-alkynylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. An alkynylamino group includes dialkynylamino and alkyl(alkynyl)amino groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkynylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one nonaromatic carbon-carbon triple bond, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, and further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C2-C10-alkynylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-arylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one aromatic ring structure attached to the nitrogen atom, wherein the aromatic ring structure contains only carbon atoms, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 6 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C6-C10-arylamino has 6 to 10 carbon atoms. An arylamino group includes diarylamino and alkyl(aryl)amino groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-arylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one aromatic ring structure attached to the nitrogen atom, wherein the aromatic ring structure contains only carbon atoms, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C6-C10-arylamino has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-aralkylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 8 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C7-C10-aralkylamino has 7 to 10 carbon atoms. An aralkylamino group includes diaralkylamino, alkyl(aralkyl)amino, and aryl(aralkyl)amino groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-aralkylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, wherein at least 6 of the carbon atoms form an aromatic ring structure containing only carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C7-C10-aralkylamino has 7 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroarylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the additional heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, an unsubstituted C1-C10-heteroarylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. A heteroarylamino group includes alkyl(heteroaryl)amino and aryl(heteroaryl)amino groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroarylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least one hydrogen atom, at least two additional heteroatoms, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the additional heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the additional heteroatoms is not part of the one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, an substituted C1-C10-heteroarylamino has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroaralkylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, at least three hydrogen atoms, at least one additional heteroatom, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and all of the additional heteroatoms form an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, an unsubstituted C2-C10-heteroaralkylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms. A heteroaralkylamino group includes alkyl(heteroaralkyl)amino and aryl(heteroaralkyl)amino groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroaralkylamino” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having one or two saturated carbon atoms attached to the nitrogen atom, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least two additional heteroatoms, that is, in addition to the nitrogen atom at the point of attachment, wherein at least one of the carbon atoms and at least one of the additional heteroatoms are incorporated into one or more aromatic ring structures, further wherein at least one of the heteroatoms is not part of an aromatic ring structure, further wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C2-C10-heteroaralkylamino has 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-amido” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a carbonyl group attached via its carbon atom to the nitrogen atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, 1 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of one oxygen atom, a total of one nitrogen atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C1-C10-amido has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. A amido group includes N-alkyl-amido, N-aryl-amido, N-aralkyl-amido, acylamino, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, and ureido groups. The group, —NHCOCH3, is an example of an unsubstituted amido group.
  • The term “substituted Cn-amido” refers to a radical, having a single nitrogen atom as the point of attachment, further having a carbonyl group attached via its carbon atom to the nitrogen atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n aromatic or nonaromatic carbon atoms, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, at least one additional heteroatom in addition to the oxygen of the carbonyl group, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C1-C10-amido has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The group, —NHCO2C(CH3)3, is an example of an substituted amido group.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is an unsubstituted Cn-alkyl, as that term is defined above. The group, —SCH3, is an example of an unsubstituted alkylthio group.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is a substituted Cn-alkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkenylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is an unsubstituted Cn-alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkenylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is a substituted Cn-alkenyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkynylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is an unsubstituted Cn-alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkenylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SR, in which R is a substituted Cn-alkynyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-arylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-aryl, as that term is defined above. The group, —SC6H5, is an example of an unsubstituted arylthio group.
  • The term “substituted Cn-arylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-aryl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-aralkylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-aralkyl, as that term is defined above. The group, —SCH2C6H5, is an example of an unsubstituted aralkyl group.
  • The term “substituted Cn-aralkylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-aralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroarylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroarylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-heteroaryl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-heteroaralkylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is an unsubstituted Cn-heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “substituted Cn-heteroaralkylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAr, in which Ar is a substituted Cn-heteroaralkyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-acylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAc, in which Ac is an unsubstituted Cn-acyl, as that term is defined above. The group, —SCOCH3, is an example of an unsubstituted acylthio group.
  • The term “substituted Cn-acylthio” refers to a group, having the structure —SAc, in which Ac is a substituted Cn-acyl, as that term is defined above.
  • The term “unsubstituted Cn-alkylsilyl” refers to a radical, having a single silicon atom as the point of attachment, further having one, two, or three saturated carbon atoms attached to the silicon atom, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, containing a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 5 or more hydrogen atoms, a total of 1 silicon atom, and no additional heteroatoms. For example, an unsubstituted C1-C10-alkylsilyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. An alkylsilyl group includes dialkylamino groups. The groups, —Si(CH3)3 and —Si(CH3)2C(CH3)3, are examples of unsubstituted alkylsilyl groups.
  • The term “substituted Cn-alkylsilyl” refers to a radical, having a single silicon atom as the point of attachment, further having at least one, two, or three saturated carbon atoms attached to the silicon atom, no carbon-carbon double or triple bonds, further having a linear or branched, cyclic or acyclic structure, further having a total of n carbon atoms, all of which are nonaromatic, 0, 1, or more than one hydrogen atom, and at least one additional heteroatom, that is, in addition to the silicon atom at the point of attachment, wherein each additional heteroatom is independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, F, Cl, Br, I, Si, P, and S. For example, a substituted C1-C10-alkylsilyl has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts,” as used herein, refers to salts of compounds of this invention that are substantially non-toxic to living organisms. Typical pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those salts prepared by reaction of a compound of this invention with an inorganic or organic acid, or an organic base, depending on the substituents present on the compounds of the invention.
  • Examples of inorganic acids which may be used to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable salts include: hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, phosphorous acid and the like. Examples of organic acids which may be used to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable salts include: aliphatic mono- and dicarboxylic acids, such as oxalic acid, carbonic acid, citric acid, succinic acid, phenyl-substituted alkanoic acids, aliphatic and aromatic sulfuric acids and the like. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts prepared from inorganic or organic acids thus include hydrochloride, hydrobromide, nitrate, sulfate, pyrosulfate, bisulfate, sulfite, bisulfate, phosphate, monohydrogenphosphate, dihydrogenphosphate, metaphosphate, pyrophosphate, hydroiodide, hydrofluoride, acetate, propionate, formate, oxalate, citrate, lactate, p-toluenesulfonate, methanesulfonate, maleate, and the like. Other suitable salts are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts may also be formed by reacting the agents of the invention with an organic base such as methylamine, ethylamine, ethanolamine, lysine, ornithine and the like. Other suitable salts are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the salts formed between carboxylate or sulfonate groups found on some of the compounds of this invention and inorganic cations, such as sodium, potassium, ammonium, or calcium, or such organic cations as isopropylammonium, trimethylammonium, tetramethylammonium, and imidazolium.
  • It should be recognized that the particular anion or cation forming a part of any salt of this invention is not critical, so long as the salt, as a whole, is pharmacologically acceptable and as long as the anion or cation does not contribute undesired qualities or effects. Further, additional pharmaceutically acceptable salts are known to those skilled in the art, and may be used within the scope of the invention. Additional examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts and their methods of preparation and use are presented in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection and Use—A Handbook, by C. G. Wermuth and P. H. Stahl, Verlag Helvetica Chimica Acta, 2002, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • As used herein, the term “patient” is intended to include living organisms in which certain conditions as described herein can occur. Examples include humans, monkeys, cows, sheep, goats, dogs, cats, mice, rats, and transgenic species thereof. In a preferred embodiment, the patient is a primate. In an even more preferred embodiment, the primate is a human. Other examples of subjects include experimental animals such as mice, rats, dogs, cats, goats, sheep, pigs, and cows. The experimental animal can be an animal model for a disorder, e.g., a transgenic mouse with an Alzheimer's-type neuropathology. A patient can be a human suffering from a neurodegenerative disease, such as Alzheimer's disease, or Parkinson's disease.
  • As used herein, the term “IC50” refers to an inhibitory dose which is 50% of the maximum response obtained.
  • As used herein, the term “water soluble” means that the compound dissolves in water at least to the extent of 0.010 mole/liter or is classified as soluble according to literature precedence.
  • As used herein, predominantly one enantiomer means that the compound contains at least 95% of one enantiomer, or more preferably at least 98% of one enantiomer, or most preferably at least 99% of one enantiomer. For example, a compound may contain 99% (+) TBE-31 and 1% (−) TBE-31.
  • Other abbreviations used herein are as follows: DMSO, dimethyl sulfoxide; iNOS, inducible nitric oxide synthase; COX-2, cyclooxygenase-2; NGF, nerve growth factor; IBMX, isobutylmethylxanthine; FBS, fetal bovine serum; GPDH, glycerol 3-phosphate dehydrogenase; RXR, retinoid X receptor; TGF-β, transforming growth factor-β; IFN-γ, interferon-γ; LPS, bacterial endotoxic lipopolysaccharide; TNF-α, tumor necrosis factor-α; IL-1β, interleukin-1β; GAPDH, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase; MTT, 3-[4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl]-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide; TCA, trichloroacetic acid.
  • The use of the word “a” or “an” when used in conjunction with the term “comprising” or “having” in the claims and/or the specification may mean “one,” but it is also consistent with the meaning of “one or more,” “at least one,” and “one or more than one.” As used herein “another” may mean at least a second or more.
  • III. Synthetic Triterpenoids and TBEs
  • Triterpenoids, biosynthesized in plants by the cyclization of squalene, are used for medicinal purposes in many Asian countries; and some, like ursolic and oleanolic acids, are known to be anti-inflammatory and anti-carcinogenic (Huang et al., 1994; Nishino et al., 1988). However, the biological activity of these naturally-occurring molecules is relatively weak, and therefore the synthesis of new analogs to enhance their potency was undertaken (Honda et al., 1997; Honda et al., 1998). Subsequent research by the inventors has identified a number of synthetic compounds that have improved activity as compared to the naturally-occurring triterpenoids.
  • A. CDDO Family Compounds
  • The ongoing efforts for the improvement of anti-inflammatory and antiproliferative activity of oleanolic and ursolic acid analogs led to the discovery of 2-cyano-3,12-dioxooleane-1,9(11)-dien-28-oic acid (CDDO) and related compounds (e.g., CDDO-Me, TP-225, CDDO-Im) (Honda et al., 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000a, 2000b, 2002; Suh et al., 1998; 1999; 2003; Place et al., 2003; Liby et al., 2005). Clinical trials of CDDO (TP-151) and CDDO-Me (TP-155) as anticancer drugs started in 2005.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00009
  • CDDO is the prototype for a large number of compounds in a family of agents that have been shown useful in a variety of contexts, including cancer treatment and chemoprevention. CDDO-Me (TP-155), CDDO-Im (TP-235), and CDDO-Ethylamide (TP-319) are CDDO derivatives that are modified at the C-28 position.
  • CDDO-Me and CDDO-Im are also reported to possess capacities to modulate transforming growth factor-β (TGF-β)/Smad signaling in several types of cells (Suh et al., 2003; Minns et al., 2004; Mix et al., 2004)
  • The following formula provides CDDO family compounds that may be used in accordance with the present invention:
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00010
  • wherein R2, is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C6-C15-aryl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C1-C15-heteroaryl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-arylamino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroarylamino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido; R7 is H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-arylamino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroarylamino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido; further wherein any ketone group shown in the above structure may replaced by its enol tautomer, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and hydrates thereof.
  • CDDO compounds corresponding to this formula can be prepared according to the methods taught by Honda et al., 2000b and Honda et al., 2002, which are both incorporated herein by reference.
  • B. TBE Compounds
  • It has been shown that tricyclic-bis-enone compounds (TBEs) with similar enone functionalities in rings A and C also inhibit NO production in mouse macrophages (Favaloro et al., 2002) and RAW cells. In particular, bis-cyano enone (±)-TBE-9 is orally active in a preliminary in vivo inflammation model (Favaloro et al., 2002).
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00011
  • In addition, is has been found that (+)-TBE-9 having the opposite configuration to that of CDDO shows 10-times higher inhibitory activity than (−)-TBE-9 on NO production in mouse macrophages. To the contrary, (−)-TBE-9 is active against MCF-7 mouse breast cancer cell lines, whilst (+)-TBE-9 is inactive (Honda et al., 2003; U.S. Patent Publication No. US2003/0232786).
  • Therefore, additional TBE compounds were designed. Initial attention was focused on modifying the C-8a position because insertion of functionalities at C-8a would be expected to improve the potency and pharmacokinetics because the balance between hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity is shifted. Also, water-soluble compounds could be obtained by the insertion of appropriate functionalities. In addition, although some biologically active natural products have functionalities at the same position (e.g., anti-tumor quassinoids (Cassady et al., 1980)), CDDO analogs with functionalities at the same position cannot be synthesized from oleanolic acid. Various C-8a functionalized (including typical electron-withdrawing and releasing groups) TBE compounds were synthesized using the simple tricycles 1a-1c, shown below, as starting materials, whose efficient synthesis has been established in Honda et al., 2005, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00012
  • The potency of the new TBEs for inhibition of NO production in RAW cells has been evaluated. Among the compounds studied, it was found that (±)-TBE-31, having a C1-8a alkyne group is extremely potent at one nanomolar concentrations. The potency is much higher than CDDO and equal to TP-225, which has the highest potency amongst semi-synthetic triterpenoids in the same assay (Honda et al., 2002). In addition, TBE-31 shows extremely high potency in various in vitro and in vivo assays. For example, TBE-31 inhibits proliferation of RMPI 8226 human myeloma cells and U937 human leukemia cells. TBE-31 is a potent inducer of heme oxygenase-1 in U937 cells. TBE-31 is orally active in the in vivo assay of heme oxygenase-1 induction. This potency is much higher than CDDO and equal to CDDO-Im, which has the highest potency amongst semi-synthetic triterpenoids in the same assay (Liby et al., 2005). TBE-31 induces CD11b expression in U937 cells. This potency is much higher than CDDO and CDDO-Im. TBE-31 inhibits iNOS in RAW cells stimulated with interferon-γ.
  • Given the structural similarities between TBEs and CDDO compounds, especially the presence of the two enone groups, which are believed to function as Michael addition acceptors, the inventors contemplate that the TBEs will promote the growth of bone and/or cartilage. The TBEs, which are described in the present invention, may have the capacity to modulate transforming growth factor-β (TGF-β)/Smad signaling in several types of cells.
  • i. Synthesis of (±)-TBE-31 and 34 in Racemic Form
  • Intermediate I is a key intermediate for the synthesis of various TBE-31 analogs. Scheme 1 shows the synthesis of Common Intermediate I.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00013
  • Compounds 1a-1c were obtained from cyclohexanone according to the method of Honda et al. 2005, which is incorporated herein by reference. Without separation, a mixture of 1a-1c was converted to a mixture of 1b and 1c with ethereal diazomethane. Compound 2 was obtained from the mixture of 1b and 1c by protection of their carbonyl groups with ethylene glycol (EG) in the presence of pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate (PPTS) in benzene (PhH) (Sterzycki, 1979), followed by LiAlH4 reduction (53% yield from the mixture of 1a-1c). Swern oxidation (DMSO and oxalyl chloride, Omura and Swern, 1978) of 2 gave 3 in quantitative yield. Compound 4 was prepared in 80% yield as a mixture of E/Z chlorovinyl isomers by Wittig reaction on 3 with (chloromethyl)triphenylphosphonium chloride (Mella et al., 1988). Dehydrochlorination of 4 with methyl lithium, followed by quenching the acetylide with aqueous NH4Cl solution afforded the common intermediate I in 95% yield (21% overall yield from cyclohexanone) (Mella et al., 1988). Noteworthy is that 100 g of I can be made from 160 g of cyclohexanone by this sequence.
  • TBE-31 and 34 in racemic form were synthesized from I by the sequence shown in Scheme 2.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00014
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00015
  • Treatment of lithium acetylide of I with chlorotrimethylsilane (TMSCl) gave 5 in 93% yield. Deketalization of 5 afforded 6 in 97% yield. Enone 7 was prepared in 65% yield by a chromium-mediated allylic oxidation of 6 (Muzart, 1987). TBE-34 was obtained in 61% yield by double cyanation of 7 with lithium diisopropylamide (LDA) and p-toluenesulfonyl cyanide (p-TsCN) (Kahne et al., 1981), followed by 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyanobenzoquinone (DDQ) oxidation (36% overall yield from I). The TMS group was removed by tetra(n-butyl)ammonium fluoride (TBAF) (Cai et al., 1995) to give TBE-31 in 71% yield (25% overall yield from I). Also, intermediate 5 was directly made in 93% yield from 4 using Corey's method (Corey et al., 1973) without going through intermediate I.
  • ii. Synthesis of Optically Active (−)- and (+)-TBE-31 and 34
  • Optically active (−)- and (+)-TBE-31 and 34 were synthesized by the sequence shown in Scheme 3.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00016
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00017
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00018
  • The resolution of alcohol 1c was carried out in the manner described by Grieco (Grieco and Speake, 1998). Treatment of 1c with the chiral diol, (−)-(R,R)-2,3-butanediol afforded the pair of diastereomers 8 and 9. Separation of the two diastereomers was achieved by iterative flash column chromatography to give diastereomer 8 (including 8% of 9) in 29% yield and diastereomer 9 (including 10% of 8) in 26% yield. The diastereomeric purity was determined by 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) using the integration values of the methyl signals (δ 0.92 and 0.88 of 8, and 0.96 and 0.86 of 9) for the two diasteromers.
  • Diastereomer 8 was then treated with acidic methanol and the resulting ketone (+)-1c was obtained in 91% yield. Similarly, the other diastereomer 9 gave (−)-1c in 88% yield under the same conditions. Based on the diastereomeric purity, we concluded that (+)-1c includes 8% of (−)-1c (enantiomeric excess (ee), 84%) and (−)-1c includes 10% of (+)-1c (ee, 80%). The CD values for the two enantiomers (+)-1c and (−)-1c are Δ288=+0.22, and Δ288=−0.22 respectively. Based on these CD values and application of the octant rule (Charney, 1979), we have determined that (+)-1c has the same configuration as that of CDDO and (−)-1c has the opposite configuration.
  • Enantiomer (+)-1c was treated with ethylene glycol and PPTS to give the protected ketone, which was subjected to Swern oxidation with oxalyl chloride and dimethyl sulfoxide. A Wittig reaction of the resulting aldehyde with (chloromethyl) triphenylphosphonium chloride afforded the alkenyl chloride (+)-4 in 65% yield. Treatment of (+)-4 with methyl lithium and quenching of the resulting anion by TMSCl gave the TMS protected acetylene. Deprotection of the ketal group was followed by a chromium mediated allylic oxidation with t-butyl hydroperoxide which afforded the enone. Double cyanation of the enone with LDA and p-TsCN gave the dinitrile intermediate, which was oxidized by DDQ in benzene to give the desired compound (−)-TBE-34 in 18% yield. Removal of the TMS group was achieved by treatment of (−)-TBE-34 with TBAF to give (−)-TBE-31 in 48% yield.
  • (+)-TBE-34 was obtained from (−)-1c in 15% yield by the same procedure used to obtain (−)-TBE-34 from (+)-1c. Removal of the TMS group from (+)-TBE-34 with TBAF afforded the desired (+)-TBE-31 in 37% yield.
  • iii. Design and Synthesis of New TBE-31 Analogs Using Alkyl Lithium
  • As shown below, TBE-31 analogs having the structure III, shown below, can be synthesized from compounds having the structure II, also shown below, which is obtained from compound I using alkyl lithium (n-BuLi, MeLi and so on) and R1X (nucleophilic substitution). TBE-34 (intermediate of TBE-31), TBE-35, 36, 38, and 39 have been prepared in this fashion.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00019
  • The specific synthetic methods of obtaining TBE-35, 36, 38, and 39 are shown in Schemes 4-7, respectively.
  • Scheme 4 shows the synthesis of TBE-35 from I.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00020
  • Insertion of the methyl group into the acetylene moiety was achieved by treating the intermediate I with methyl lithium and trapping the resulting anion with methyl iodide, to give 10 in 91% yield. The ketal 10 was subjected to acidic conditions to give the ketone 11 in 86% yield. Allylic oxidation of 11 afforded the enone 12 (59% yield). Double cyanation of 12 with LDA and p-TsCN gave the dinitrile, which was reacted with DDQ in benzene to give the desired compound TBE-35 in 48% (22% overall yield from I).
  • Scheme 5 shows the synthesis of TBE-36 from I.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00021
  • Reaction of compound I with MeLi and iodoethane gave the ethyl acetylene 13 in 69% yield. Compound 13 was treated with aqueous HCl solution to give the ketone 14 in 91% yield. Allylic oxidation of 14 afforded the diketone 15 in 33% yield. Treatment of 15 with LDA and p-TsCN gave the dinitrile intermediate, which was subjected to oxidation by DDQ in benzene to give the desired compound TBE-36 in 23% yield (5% overall yield from I).
  • Scheme 6 shows the synthesis of TBE-38 from I.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00022
  • Treatment of lithium acetylide of I with phenyl cyanate (PhOCN) afforded 16 in 64% yield (Murray et al., 1980). Deketalization of 16 gave 17 in 96% yield. Allylic oxidation of 17 gave 18 in 53% yield. Double cyanation of 18, followed by DDQ oxidation gave TBE-38 in 13% yield (4% overall yield from I).
  • Scheme 7 shows the synthesis of TBE-39 from I.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00023
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00024
  • The aldehyde 19 was obtained by the formylation of alkyne I with dimethylformamide and boron triflouride etherate in 91% yield (Iguchi et al, 1993). The Wittig reaction of aldehyde 19 with (chloromethyl) triphenylphosphonium chloride gave the alkenyl chloride 20 in 76% yield. Treatment of 20 with methyl lithium and quenching of the resulting anion with TMSCl yielded the TMS protected alkyne. Treatment of this alkyne with aqueous HCl solution afforded the ketone 21 in 72% yield. Allylic oxidation of 21 gave the enone 22 in 50% yield. Double cyanation of 22 with p-TsCN gave the dinitrile intermediate, which was subsequently oxidized with DDQ to give the bis-enone 23 in 22% yield. Removal of the TMS group with TBAF gave the desired compound TBE-39 in 28% yield (2% overall yield from I).
  • As an amine hydrochloride, compound 25, shown below, would be water-soluble, making this compound very interesting. The synthetic plan is shown in Scheme 8.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00025
  • Compound 24 can be synthesized by treatment of acetylide of I with commercially available Br(CH2)2NHBoc, followed by deketalization and subsequent protection with Boc2O. Compound 25 can be obtained from 24 by the same sequence (allylic oxidation, double cyanation, and DDQ oxidation) as for other TBEs, followed by deprotection with HCl.
  • iv. Design and Synthesis of New TBE-31 Analogs Using Sonogashira Coupling
  • Sonogashira coupling of acetylene with aryl halide and/or vinyl halide using palladium complex (e.g. PdCl2(PPh3)2) and CuI is a very useful reaction for the synthesis of various acetylene derivatives (Sonogashira et al., 1975). Compounds having structure III can be synthesized by Sonogashira coupling, as shown in Scheme 9. Also, it is possible to synthesize compounds having the structure III, directly from TBE-31. Sonogashira coupling provides a more convergent synthetic approach, allowing for the exploration of various compounds having the structure III.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00026
  • The synthetic plan of compound 29 is shown in Scheme 10. Compound 26 was successfully synthesized in 64% yield from 1 using Sonogashira coupling. Deketalization of 26 can give 27. Allylic oxidation of 27 can afford enone 28. Double cyanation of 28, followed by DDQ oxidation can give compound 29.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00027
  • v. Design and Synthesis of New TBE-31 Imidazole Analogs from Compound I Using Sonogashira Coupling
  • Water-soluble TBE-31 imidazole analogs having the structure IV can be synthesized using Sonogashira coupling, as shown in Scheme 11.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00028
  • The synthetic plan of compound 34 is shown in Scheme 12. Imidazole hydrochloride 34 is expected to be water-soluble. Compounds 30 was synthesized in 73% yield from I by Sonogashira coupling using iodo-SEM-imidazole (Paul et al. 2002). Deketalization of 30 gave 31 in 70% yield. Allylic oxidation of 31 can give 32. Double cyanation of 32, followed by DDQ oxidation can afford 33. The desired compound 34 can be obtained by removal of SEM group of 33.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00029
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00030
  • vi. Design and Synthesis of New TBE-31 Analogs from Compound I Using Mannich Reactions
  • Water-soluble TBE-31 analogs with amino side chains (38, 42, and so on) can be synthesized using Mannich reactions. Analogs 38 and 42 can be synthesized by the sequence shown in Schemes 13 and 14.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00031
  • The Mannich reaction of I with bis(dimethylamino)methane (Amstutz et al., 1987; Chung et al., 1990) under the catalysis of CuCl in refluxing THF can afford 35. Compound 38 can be obtained from 35 by the same sequence as for other TBEs.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00032
  • Compound 39 can be synthesized by the Mannich reaction using formaldehyde and pyrrolidine under the catalysis of CuCl. Compound 42 can be obtained from 39 by the same sequence as for other TBEs.
  • vii. Design and Synthesis of New TBE-31 Analogs with a Carboxyl Group in Ring A
  • Compound 48 can be synthesized by the sequence shown in Scheme 15.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00033
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00034
  • Compound 43 can be synthesized by treatment of acetylide of I with TMSCl, followed by allylic oxidation. Cyanation of 43, followed by DDQ oxidation can afford 44. After removal of ketal of 44, 46 can be obtained from 45 by Stiles' reagent (Finkbeiner et al., 1963), followed by methylation. Addition of phenylselenyl chloride (PhSeCl), followed by oxidation/elimination with H2O2 can give 47 (Liotta et al., 1981). The desired compound 48 can be prepared by treatment of 47 with K2CO3-MeOH-water (Cai et al., 1995).
  • viii. Design and Synthesis of New TBE-31 Analogs Containing Amino Side Chains from Compound I
  • A series of analogs with a C-8a alkyne group and C-7 amino side chains having general formula V (Scheme 16) was designed for the following reasons. In many cases, amine side chains like pyrrolidine, piperidine, imidazole etc. affect biological properties, e.g., potency and pharmacokinetics of the parent compounds. Also, salts of these amines would be soluble in water. Thirdly, because one Michael acceptor is diminished in these analogs in comparison with TBE-31 analogs, side effects and/or toxicity, which might be caused by Michael acceptors, may be reduced. They can be synthesized from TBE-37 by Mannich reactions with amines and formaldehyde under basic or acidic conditions. TBE-37 was synthesized from I. Compound 49 was obtained in 76% yield from I by deketalization, followed by formylation with ethyl formate in the presence of sodium methoxide in benzene (Clinton et al., 1961). Treatment of 49 with hydroxylamine (Johnson et al., 1945), followed by allylic oxidation gave 50 in 46% yield. TBE-37 was prepared by cleavage of the isoxazole of 50 with sodium methoxide (Johnson et al., 1945), followed by DDQ oxidation (12% overall yield from I).
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00035
  • ix. The Design and Synthesis of Compound 60 Using Kowalski Ester Homologation
  • Compound 60, shown below, which has a three carbon chain including the terminal acetylene group at C-8a (contrast with TBE-31, which has a two carbon chain) can be made using the Kowalski method (Kowalski et al., 1992), shown in Scheme 17. Ketalization of 1b can give 51. Compound 51 can be converted to 52 by the Kowalski method. Compound 54 can be obtained from 52 by LiAlH4 reduction, followed by Swern oxidation. Compound 60 can be synthesized via intermediate VI from 54 by the same sequence as for TBE-31. Intermediate VI is a key intermediate as well as I.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00036
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00037
    Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00038
  • Various analogs of compound VII can be prepared from compound VI using the same procedure as used for TBE-31 analogs (Scheme 18). Also, if one were to repeat the Kowalski method for 51, one can synthesize analogs shown in general formula VIII.
  • Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00039
  • IV. Bone- and Cartilage Forming Cells
  • The present invention describes methods for the ex vivo and in vivo formation of bone and cartilage using from osteogenic cells, chondrocytes, bone and cartilage precursor cells, as well as cell lines derived therefrom. The following section describes various sources for these cells, their isolation and characterization. Osteogenic or bone precursor cells are derived from primary sources such as bone marrow or bone. In addition, cells can be derived from several different species, including cells of human, bovine, equine, canine, feline and murine origin. Articular chondrocytes can generally be derived from humans according to the method taught by Hidvegi et al., 2006, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • A. Bone Precursor Cells
  • Human bone precursor cells are characterized as small-sized cells that express low amounts of bone proteins (osteocalcin, osteonectin, and alkaline phosphatase) and have a low degree of internal complexity (Long et al., 1995). When stimulated to differentiate, these preosteoblast-like cells become osteoblast-like in their appearance, size, antigenic expression, and internal structure. Although these cells are normally present at very low frequencies in bone marrow, a process for isolating these cells has been described (Long et al., 1995). U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,703 further describes methods of isolating and using bone precursor cells, and is specifically incorporated herein by reference.
  • An example of a technique for isolating bone precursor cells involves the following steps. Mononuclear cells are prepared from bone marrow by separation on ficoll or other suitable equilibrium density separation techniques known to those of skill in the art. Low-density mononuclear cells are then cultured overnight culture to remove plastic-adherent cells. An enrichment step using immuno-affinity isolation involves collection of non-adherent low-density cells using anti-osteonectin (ON) and anti-osteocalcin (OC) antibodies immobilized on plastic as described (Long et al., 1995). The immune adherent cells were collected by trypsinization. Alternative enrichment steps may involve immuno-column chromatography or fluorescence-activated cell sorting. In addition to antibodies to osteonectin and osteocalcin, antibodies to alkaline phosphatase or other cell surface markers expressed on bone precursor cells can be utilized. These are described in greater detail in a following section.
  • As used herein, a bone precursor cell is any cell that is capable of differentiating or expanding into an osteoblast cell. A bone precursor cell of the present invention is not hematopoietic and thus does not express the pan-hematopoietic antigen CD34. Preferred bone precursor cells include osteoprogenitor cells and preosteoblast cells.
  • Bone precursor cells can be further enriched by equilibrium-density centrifugation of bone marrow cells. Equilibrium-density centrifugation of bone marrow cells provides low density bone marrow cells enriched in bone precursor cells. In one embodiment, equilibrium-density centrifugation can be performed before the antibody purification. In a second embodiment, equilibrium-density centrifugation can be performed after the antibody purification. Alternatively, the equilibrium-density centrifugation purification step can be performed twice: before and after the antibody purification step.
  • In another aspect, the population of bone precursor cells can be enriched by removing stromal cells present in bone marrow cells. Removal of stromal cells can be accomplished by exposing bone marrow cells to an adherent surface, typically tissue culture plastic or glass. Stromal cells adhere to tissue culture plastic or glass while bone precursor cells do not. Stromal cells can be removed before or after the immune purification step. Preferably, stromal cells are removed prior to the immune purification step. The use of solid surfaces such as tissue culture plastic or glass is well known in the art. Tissue culture plastic and glass can be treated (e.g., silicone, nitrocellulose, nickel, etc.) to promote or inhibit cell adhesion. Treated and untreated surfaces are available commercially.
  • In another aspect, an enriched population of bone precursor cells is further fractionated according to size. In a preferred embodiment, size fractionation can be accomplished by fluorescence activated flow cytometry. Bone precursor cells of the present invention have average diameters of between about 8 microns and about 70 microns. Preferably, bone precursor cells have average diameters of between about 10 microns and about 20 microns.
  • B. Primary Human Osteoblasts
  • Another source of bone cells for use in the present invention are primary osteoblasts. An example of an isolation procedure for these cells can be found in Robey and Termaine (1985). Briefly, bone chips are obtained during orthopedic surgery. These are treated with Collagenase D for 2 hrs at 37° C., the non-adherent cells washed off, the bone pieces minced, and cultured in Ca2+-free media containing 10% FCS and Pen/Strep. After the cultures are confluent, the cells are collected by trypsinization and cultured in Ca2+-containing DMEM for 2-3 weeks. Bone-derived osteoblasts are recovered by trypsinization.
  • Alternative methods for isolating osteoblasts from bone are known in the art (see, for example, Aubin et al., 1982). As reported, the calvaria is excised, rinsed in a medium and minced with scissors. The minced bone is digested with collagenase for a short period of time in medium. The cells are removed by centrifugation and decanting the supernatant, leaving the bone pieces behind. Fetal calf serum is added to inhibit the collagenase digestion. Cells are plated at a low density in an appropriate growth medium, and clonal cell colonies are cultured in replicate for continuous culture and characterization.
  • C. Bone Cell Lines
  • In addition to primary osteoblasts and bone precursor cells as described above, various cell lines can be used as a starting point for ex vivo bone spheroid formation as described by the methods in the present invention. Cell lines can be from a number of species, including human, bovine, equine, canine, feline and murine origin. Exemplary cell lines as described in the examples included in this invention are MG-63 cells (ATCC #CRL-1427), C3/H10T1/2 cells (ATCC #CCL-226) and SAOS-2 cells (ATCC #HTB-85). Other cell lines, also available through the American Type Culture Collection, include HOS cells (ATCC# CRL-1543) and various derivatives thereof, G-292 (ATCC# CRL-1423), SJSA-1 cells (ATCC# CRL-2098), Hs 3.T cells (ATCC# CRL-7005), TE 415.T cells (ATCC# CRL-7764), TE 418.T cells (ATCC# CRL-7766), Hs 755(A).T cells (ATCC# CRL-7877), 143B cells (ATCC# CRL-8303), U-2 OS cells (ATCC# HTB-96) and T1-73 cells (ATCC# CRL-7943). These cell lines are all derived from human osteosarcomas. Similar osteosarcoma cell lines from several other species are available from ATCC.
  • D. Chondrocytes
  • Chondrocytes are the only cells found in cartilage. They produce and maintain the cartilagenous matrix. From least-to terminally-differentiated, the chondrocytic lineage is (a) colony-forming unit-fibroblast (CFU-F), (b) mesenchymal stem cell/marrow stromal cell (MSC), (c) chondrocyte, an (d) hypertrophic chondrocyte. When referring to bone or cartilage, mesenchymal stem cells (MSC) are commonly known as osteochondrogenic (or osteogenic, chondrogenic, osteoprogenitor, etc.) cells since a single MSC has shown the ability to differentiate into chondrocytes or osteoblasts, depending on the medium. In vivo, differentiation of a MSC in a vascularized area (such as bone) yields an osteoblasts, whereas differentiation of a MSC in a non-vascularized area (such as cartilage) yields a chondrocyte. Chondrocytes undergo terminal differentiation when they become hypertrophic during endochondral ossification. This last stage is characterized by major phenotypic changes in the cell. Although chondroblast is still commonly used to describe an immature chondrocyte, use of the term is discouraged, for it is technically inaccurate, since the progenitor of chondrocytes (which are mesenchymal stem cells) can also differentiate into osteoblasts.
  • V. Cellular Markers
  • A. Bone Cells and Precursors
  • Various cellular markers are used to define and/or purify osteogenic precursor cells for use in the present invention. Bone precursor cells, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,703, herein incorporated in its entirety by reference, are immunoreactive with bone precursor cell antibody. A bone precursor cell antibody is used to enrich the population of bone precursor cells. Bone precursor cell antibodies include anti-osteocalcin, anti-osteonectin, and anti-bone alkaline phosphatase. Anti-osteocalcin, anti-osteonectin, and anti-bone alkaline phosphatase were described in Shull et al. (1984). As bone precursor cells are further characterized, other antibodies which immunoreact with a bone precursor cell may be generated by one of ordinary skill in the art. The use of these other antibodies immunoreactive with a bone precursor cell are contemplated as well. In a particular embodiment, a bone precursor cell antibody is conjugated to a solid substrate. The solid substrate is preferably a tissue culture or petri dish. The use of solid surfaces such as tissue culture plastic or glass is well known in the art. Tissue culture plastic and glass can be treated (e.g., silicone, nitrocellulose, nickel, etc.) to promote or inhibit protein adhesion. Treated and untreated surfaces are available commercially. Antibody coated tissue culture dishes can be utilized to “pan” for bone precursor cells. Briefly, bone marrow cells containing bone precursor cells are incubated on antibody coated dishes. Bone precursor cells adhere to the antibodies while all other cells do not adhere to the dish. After incubation, the dish non-adherent cells are removed by gently washing the dish with media. Bone precursor cells were removed from the dish and further analyzed, purified or differentiated into osteoblasts.
  • In another embodiment, a second antibody immunoreactive with a bone precursor cell antibody can be used to enrich the population of bone precursor cells. The use of a secondary antibody is generally known in the art. Typically, secondary antibodies are antibodies immunoreactive with the constant regions of the first antibody. Preferred secondary antibodies include anti-rabbit, anti-mouse, anti-rat, anti-goat, and anti-horse and are available commercially. In a preferred embodiment, secondary antibodies are conjugated to a solid substrate including tissue culture dish, agarose, polyacrylamide, and magnetic particles. In this embodiment, a bone precursor cell antibody is first immunoreacted to a bone precursor cell. The bone precursor cell with the attached antibody is next exposed to the secondary antibody that is conjugated to a solid substrate. Enrichment of precursor cells is achieved because only cells that present a bone precursor cell antibody immunoreact with the secondary antibody. A commercially available kit provides secondary antibodies conjugated to magnetic particles. In this system, bone precursor cells that present a bone precursor cell antibody are purified by exposure to a magnetic field.
  • The preparation of bone antibodies (i.e., to osteonectin, osteocalcin and alkaline phosphatase) was reported in Shull et al., 1989, incorporated herein by reference. Both polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies are contemplated by the present invention. Means for preparing and characterizing antibodies are well known in the art (see, e.g., Harlow and Lane, 1988).
  • Cell surface antigens on normal cells of the osteogenic lineage have been reported for avian and rodent species (Bruder and Caplan, 1989; 1990; Turksen et al., 1992). Some of these antibodies reported also react with cells other than those found in bone. Monoclonal antibodies have been raised against intracellular antigens in normal human osteoblasts and against the surface of transformed human osteogenic cell lines (Embleton et al., 1981; Hosoi et al., 1982; Heiner et al., 1987; Bruland et al., 1988; Tsai et al., 1990; Walsh et al., 1994). Examples of osteogenic cell markers, production of antibodies and hybridomas, as well as methods of using these markers are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,643,736. An example of a monoclonal antibody against a cell surface epitope capable of identifying human osteogenic cells is one directed against alkaline phosphatase (Lawson et al., 1985). This well-characterized cell surface enzyme has served as the historical standard for identifying a large family of osteogenic cells, and is readily demonstrated by a simple histochemical stain.
  • Other preferred antigens include osteocalcin and osteonectin. Osteocalcin is a vitamin K-dependent bone calcium binding protein also called bone gla protein (BGP). Particularly, human osteocalcin is a relatively small protein composed of 49 amino acids and having a molecular weight of 5800. This protein is produced from osteoblast, and occupies about 20% of the constituent components of non-collagen protein of the bones. This protein contains gamma-carboxyglutamic acid residues and has a strong affinity for hydroxyapatite, and it is therefore presumed to have an important role in the formation of the bone matrices. Osteonectin, also termed BM40 or SPARC (secreted protein, acidic and rich in cysteine) is a multifunctional glycoprotein involved in tissue mineralization, cell-extracellular matrix interactions as well as angiogenesis. Non-collagenous, calcium-binding glycoprotein of developing bone. It links collagen to mineral in the bone matrix.
  • The monoclonal antibodies against precursor cells can be labeled with suitable radioactive, enzymatic, fluorescent or other labels by conventional methods and/or bound to suitable solid carriers, which will be apparent to those skilled in the art. For example, monoclonal antibodies can be used in combination with, or coupled to, an immunochemical such as fluorescein isothiocyanate, peroxidase, biotin and its analogs (e.g., iminobiotin), avidin and its analogs (streptavidin), or other such markers. Moreover, monoclonal antibodies can be bound or attached to certain substrates and utilized to capture osteogenic cells when tissue samples such as bone cell isolates, periosteal biopsies, or cultured cells are brought in contact with the attached monoclonal antibodies. The bound cells may then be separated from the solid phase by known methods depending essentially upon the nature of the solid phase and the antibody. The bound cells can be recovered and used for various therapeutic purposes such as for the regeneration of bone, etc., depending upon the various external and internal factors.
  • As a result, the present invention contemplates any method of employing monoclonal antibodies to separate normal osteogenic cell subsets from other cells such as fibroblastic or hemopoietic cells. For example, a further embodiment of the present invention is directed to a method of producing a population of normal human osteogenic cell subsets comprising the steps of providing a cell suspension of tissue containing such cells; contacting the cell suspension with monoclonal antibodies which recognize an epitope on the osteogenic cells but do not recognize an epitope on the fibroblastic or hemopoietic cells; and separating and recovering from the cell suspension the cells bound by the monoclonal antibodies.
  • B. Cartilage Cells and Precursors
  • Chondrocytes are cells found in cartilage. They produce and maintain the cartilaginous matrix. From least-to terminally-differentiated, the chondrocytic lineage starts with colony-forming unit-fibroblasts (CFU-F), which develop into mesenchymal stem cells/marrow stromal cells (MSC), continues to develop into chondrocytes, and then hypertrophic chondrocytes. In the context of bone or cartilage, mesenchymal stem cells (MSC) are commonly known as osteochondrogenic (or osteogenic, chondrogenic, osteoprogenitor, etc.) cells since a single MSC can differentiate into chondrocytes or osteoblasts, depending on the medium. In vivo, differentiation of a MSC in a vascularized area (such as bone) yields an osteoblast, whereas differentiation of a MSC in a non-vascularized area (such as cartilage) yields a chondrocyte. Chondrocytes undergo terminal differentiation when they become hypertrophic, which occurs during endochondral ossification. This last stage is characterized by major phenotypic changes on the cellular level.
  • The classic markers of the chondrocytic phenotype are Sox9, collagen II, and aggrecan (Sive et al., 2002). Sox9 is known to play a major role in chondrocyte differentiation and maintenance of the chondrocytic phenotype. The product of the collagen II (Col2a1) gene is an early and practically unique marker of chondrocyte differentiation, and aggrecan is the characteristic proteoglycan produced by chondrocytes.
  • VI. Bone/Cartilage Growth Factors
  • The use of growth factors from the TGF-β gene superfamily to produce bone ex vivo is an important aspect of the present invention. The following section details attributes of the TGF-β gene superfamily. Of particular use are growth factors that induce the formation of a bone cell spheroid, as defined in the previous section.
  • The transforming growth factor-β superfamily is a well-characterized family of proteins involved in cellular proliferation and differentiation of cells into various tissues. Members of the TGF-β superfamily are generally dimeric in structure, comprising two monomeric units which are produced by proteolytic cleavage from a larger precursor protein, of which the processed monomer represents the carboxyl terminal portion. The dimeric TGF-β proteins generally have molecular weights of approximately 20,000 to 35,000 and share a common cysteine pattern in the mature protein region. See, for example, Sporn et al. (1986) and the papers cited therein. The TGF-β superfamily includes several subgroups beside TGF-β1 through -β5. These are the bone morphogenetic proteins (BMPs), growth and differentiation factors (GDFs), the inhibins, as well as GDNF and Mullerian inhibitory substance and other structurally related proteins. The TGF-β superfamily also includes proteins from other species, which have been characterized and are highly conserved compared to the mammalian TGF-βs, including Vg1 (Xenopus), (Weeks and Melton, 1987); Dpp, Screw and 60A (Drosophila), (Padgett et al., 1987; Doctor et al., 1992); and more recently identified proteins including Univin (sea urchin), Dorsalin-1 (chicken) and Radar (Zebrafish). Other factors which may be effectively used in the composition include synthetic molecules or fragments of a TGF-β superfamily member which are able to bind to a TGF-β receptor molecule.
  • The transforming growth factor-β (TGF-β) family of proteins consists of a number of related, but functionally distinct, proteins (Barnard, 1990; Roberts and Sporn, 1990). One member of the TGF-β family of proteins, TGF-β1, is a multifunctional cytokine with both growth promoting and inhibiting activities. Recently, TGF-β1 has been found to play a role in modulating repair of vascular injuries such as restenosis lesions (Nikol et al., 1992) and atherosclerotic plaques (Kojima et al., 1991).
  • Members of the TGF-β family of proteins initiate cell signaling by binding to heteromeric receptor complexes of type I (TβRI) and type II (TβRII) serine/threonine kinase receptors (reviewed by Massague et al., 1994; Miyazono et al., 1994). Activation of this heteromeric receptor complex occurs when TGF-β binds to TβRII, which then recruits and phosphorylates TβRI. Activated TβRI then propagates the signal to downstream targets (Chen and Weinberg, 1995; Wrana et al., 1994).
  • Until now, three distinct types of TGF-βs designated as TGF-β1, TGF-β2 and TGF-β3 which are functionally closely related and share a high degree of receptor cross-reactivity have been cloned and characterized by sequence analysis. All TGF-βs are synthesized as 390 to 412 amino acid precursors that undergo proteolytic cleavage to produce the monomeric forms, which consist of the C-terminal 112 amino acids. In their mature, biologically active forms, TGF-βs are acid- and heat-stable disulfide-linked homodimers of two polypeptide chains of 112 amino acids each. The complete amino acid sequences of human (Derynck et al., 1985), murine (Derynck et al., 1986) and simian TGF-β1 (Sharples et al., 1987) show remarkable sequence conservation, differing only in a single amino acid residue. Comparison of the amino acid sequence of human TGF-β1, human TGF-β2 (de Martin et al., 1987; Marquardt et al., 1987) and human TGF-β3 (Ten Dijke et al. 1988) has demonstrated that the three proteins exhibit in their mature forms about 70-80% sequence identity. A heterodimeric TGF-β1.2 has been isolated from porcine platelets and consists of one subunit of TGF-β1 disulfide-linked to one subunit of TGF-β2 (Cheifetz et al., 1987).
  • The search for the molecule or molecules responsible for formation of bone, cartilage, tendon and other tissues present in bone and other tissue extracts has led to the discovery of a novel set of molecules called the Bone Morphogenetic Proteins (BMPs), which are also members of the TGF-β gene family. The structures of several proteins, designated BMP-1 through BMP-15, have previously been elucidated. The unique inductive activities of these proteins, along with their presence in bone, cartilage and/or other vital tissues, suggests that they are important regulators of bone and other tissue repair processes, and may be involved in tissue formation, maintenance and repair. There is a need to identify improved methods and compositions for formation, maintenance and repair of such tissues.
  • Members of the bone morphogenetic protein family have been shown to be useful for induction of cartilage and bone formation. For example, BMP-2 has been shown to be able to induce the formation of new cartilage and/or bone tissue in vivo in a rat ectopic implant model, see U.S. Pat. No. 5,013,649; in mandibular defects in dogs (Toriumi et al., 1991); in femoral segmental defects in sheep (Gerhart et al., 1991). Other members of the BMP family have also been shown to have osteogenic activity, including BMP-4, -6 and -7 (Wozney, 1993). BMP proteins have also been shown to demonstrate inductive and/or differentiation potentiating activity on a variety of other tissues, including cartilage, tendon, ligament, neural tissue.
  • Other factors that are useful in accordance with the present invention include the following: BMP-3 (Vukicevic et al., 1989); growth factors, such as basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF); glucocorticoids, such as dexamethasone (Cheng et al., 1994); and prostaglandins, such as prostaglandin E1 (Chen et al., 1991). Further, ascorbic acid and its analogs, such as ascorbic acid-2-phosphate (Tennenbaum et al., 1982) and glycerol phosphates, such as β-glycerophosphate (Bruder et al., 1991) are effective adjunct factors for advanced differentiation, although alone they do not induce osteogenic differentiation. Other factors include Inhibin A (Chen et al., 1993), chondrogenic stimulatory activity factor (CSA) (Syftestad et al., 1985), collagenous extracellular matrix molecules, including type I collagen, particularly as a gel (Kimura et al., 1984), and vitamin A analogs, such as retinoic acid (Langille et al., 1989).
  • Also of interest in the present invention are insulin-like growth factors. IGF-I and IGF-II each have a molecular weight of about 7,500 daltons. Each of IGF-I and IGF-II possesses A and B domains that are highly homologous to the corresponding domains of proinsulin. A and B domains are connected to each other by a C domain. A carboxy-terminal extension, the D domain, is present in IGF, but is not found in proinsulin. Both IGF-I and IGF-II are single-chain polypeptides each with 3 disulfide bridges and have a sequence identity of 49% and 47%, respectively, to human insulin A chain and B chain. Like insulin, IGFs stimulate phosphorylation of specific tyrosine residues within the cytoplasmic domain of the receptors to which they bind, as described in WO 93/98826. The designation “insulin-like growth factor” was chosen to express the insulin-like effects and the insulin-like structure of these polypeptides which act as mitogens on a number of cells, as described in EP 128 733. IGF-I is a 70 amino acid peptide, while IGF-II is a 67 amino acid peptide, as described in Rinderknecht (1978a) and (1978b). IGF-I and IGF-II have 62% structural homology to each other. Both have been isolated from human serum.
  • Insulin-like growth factors are also known under the class name somatomedins, and have been identified in various animal species as polypeptides that act to stimulate growth of cells in a variety of tissues and cell types, particularly during development. Growth promoting effects of somatomedins include enhancement of cell multiplication and stimulation of cartilage proliferation, stimulation of transport of amino acids, stimulation of synthesis of RNA, DNA and protein, and stimulation of incorporation of sulfate into proteoglycan and of proline into collagen. Much mammalian postnatal growth is due to stimulation of cartilage growth by somatomedins and growth in utero may also be somatomedin-dependent.
  • Yet another important growth factor that can be utilized according to the present invention is vascular endothelial growth factor/vascular permeability factor (VEGF/VPF). This protein is an endothelial cell-specific mitogen which has been shown to be stimulated by hypoxia and required for tumor angiogenesis. Sanger et al. (1986); Kim et al. (1993); Schweiki et al. (1992); Plate et al. (1992). It is a 34-43 kDa (with the predominant species at about 45 kDa) dimeric, disulfide-linked glycoprotein synthesized and secreted by a variety of tumor and normal cells. VEGF appears to play a principle role in many pathological states and processes related to neovascularization
  • VII. Ex Vivo Culturing of Bone and Cartilage Cells
  • The present invention calls for the use of serum-free media for growth and differentiation of the bone and cartilage cells and precursors thereof. The use of serum-free culture for the manufacture of recombinant biopharmaceuticals from mammalian cells has been thoroughly reviewed (Barnes, 1987; Barnes and Sam, 1980; Broad et al., 1991; Jayme, 1991). The list of the main additives which are used as supplements for serum-free media is summarized by Barnes (1987) and Barnes & Sam (1980). Most commercially available serum-free media contain a carrier protein such as albumin. The presence of carrier protein might be required for protection of the cell viability.
  • An example of serum free culture medium can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,063,157, herein incorporated by reference. The media described is for non-adherent mammalian cells comprises, in addition to the base medium, transferrin, insulin, a peptone, a β-D-xylopyranose derivative, selenite and a biological polyamine. Another serum free cell growth medium for mammalian cells is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,443,546. This growth medium, in addition to the basic medium, contains seven ingredients. European Patent Application 481,791 discloses a culture medium for CHO cells comprising water, an osmolality regulator, a buffer, an energy source, amino acids, an iron source, a growth factor and other optional components. The two media exemplified contain 19 and 17 components, respectively. Other additives are disclosed below.
  • A. Albumin
  • Albumin is preferably supplied in the form of bovine (BSA) or human serum albumin (HSA) in an effective amount for the growth of cells. Albumin provides a source of protein in the media. Albumin is thought to act as a carrier for trace elements and essential fatty acids. Preferably, the albumin used in the present formulations is free of pyrogens and viruses, and when necessary, is approved regulatory agencies for infusion into human patients. The HSA may be deionized using resin beads prior to use. The concentration of human serum albumin is 1-8 mg/ml, more particularly 3-5 mg/ml, and specifically 4 mg/ml.
  • B. Soluble Carrier/Fatty Acid Complex
  • The albumin mentioned above could be substituted by a soluble carrier/essential fatty acid complex and a soluble carrier cholesterol complex which can effectively deliver the fatty acid and cholesterol to the cells. An example of such a complex is a cyclodextrin/linoleic acid, cholesterol and oleic acid complex. This is advantageous as it would allow for the replacement of the poorly characterized albumin with a well defined molecule. The use of cyclodextrin removes the need for the addition of human/animal serum albumin, thereby eliminating any trace undesired materials which the albumin would introduce into the media. The use of cyclodextrin simplifies the addition of specific lipophilic nutrients to a serum-free culture.
  • The lipophilic substances which can be complexed with cyclodextrin include unsaturated fatty acids such as linoleic acid, cholesterol and oleic acid. The linoleic acid, cholesterol and oleic acid are present in effective amounts and can be present in equal proportions such that the total amount is 0.001 to 100 μg/ml, particularly 0.1 to 10 μg/ml. The preparation of such complexes is known in the art and is described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,533,637, the entire contents of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • C. Iron Source
  • A source of iron in an effective amount and in a form that can be utilized by the cells can be added to the media. The iron can be supplied by saturating transferrin, its carrier molecule, in an effective amount. The transferrin may be derived from animal sera or recombinantly synthesized. It is understood that when transferrin is derived from an animal source, it is purified to remove other animal proteins, and thus is usually at least 99% pure. The transferrin concentration is usually between 80 and 500 μg/ml, in particular between 120 and 500 μg/ml, more particularly between 130 and 500 μg/ml, even more particularly between 275 and 400 μg/ml and specifically 300 μg/ml. An iron salt, preferably a water soluble iron salt, such as iron chloride (e.g., FeCl3.6H2O) dissolved in an aqueous solution such as an organic acid solution (e.g., citric acid) is used to supply the iron to transferrin. One mole of iron chloride is usually used for every mole of citric acid. The concentration of iron chloride is 0.0008 to 8 μg/ml, more particularly 0.08 to 0.8 μg/ml, and specifically 0.08 μg/ml.
  • D. Insulin Growth Factor
  • Insulin also may be added to the media of the present invention in an effective amount. The insulin concentration is between 0.25 and 2.5 U/ml, more preferably 0.4-2.1 U/ml, most preferably 0.48 U/ml. In the conversion of Units to mass, 27 U=1 mg. Therefore, incorporating the conversion, the insulin concentration is approximately between 9.26 μg/ml and 92.6 μg/ml, more particulary between 14.8 μg/ml and 77.8 μg/ml, and specifically 17.7 μg/ml. It is again understood that human insulin is more desirable than animal insulin. Highly purified recombinant insulin is most preferred. An insulin like growth factor such as insulin like growth factor 1 and insulin like growth factor 2 may be used in place of or in addition to insulin in an amount which provides substantially the same result as a corresponding amount of insulin. Thus, the term “insulin growth factor” includes both insulin and insulin like growth factors.
  • E. Additional Components
  • The addition of other lipids to the above essential reagents could enhance the proliferative potential of precursor cells. These components, however, are preferably not added unless they are necessary for a particular experiment or to grow a particular type of cell. Optionally, triglycerides and/or phospholipids may be included as additional sources of lipid. A preferable source of lipid contains a mixture of neutral triglycerides of predominantly unsaturated fatty acids such as linoleic, oleic, palmitic, linolenic, and stearic acid. Such a preparation may also contain phosphatidylethanolamine and phosphatidylcholine. Another source of lipid is a human plasma fraction precipitated by ethanol and preferably rendered virus free by pasteurization.
  • Other ingredients which can optionally be added to the media are cited in the following references: WO 95/06112, U.S. Pat. No. 4,533,637, U.S. Pat. No. 5,405,772. The entire contents of all of these references are incorporated by reference.
  • F. Undesired Components
  • When the media is to be used to grow cells for introduction into a human patient, the media preferably does not contain ingredients such as bovine serum albumin, mammalian serum, and/or any natural proteins of human or mammalian origin (as explained above). It is preferable that recombinant or synthetic proteins, if they are available and of high quality, are used. Most preferably, the amino acid sequences of the recombinant or synthetic proteins are identical to or highly homologous with those of humans. Thus, the most preferable serum-free media formulations herein contain no animal-derived proteins and do not have even a non-detectable presence of animal protein.
  • In the most ideal system, optional components which are not necessary are preferably not added to the medium. Such optional components are described in the prior art cited above and may be selected from the group consisting of meat extract, peptone, phosphatidylcholine, ethanolamine, anti-oxidants, deoxyribonucleosides, ribonucleosides, soy bean lecithin, corticosteroids, myoinositol, monothioglycerol, and bovine or other animal serum albumin.
  • VIII. Pharmaceutical Formulations and Routes of Administration
  • The compounds of the present invention may be administered by a variety of methods, e.g., orally or by injection (e.g. subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal, etc.). Depending on the route of administration, the active compounds may be coated in a material to protect the compound from the action of acids and other natural conditions which may inactivate the compound. They may also be administered by continuous perfusion/infusion of a disease or wound site.
  • To administer the therapeutic compound by other than parenteral administration, it may be necessary to coat the compound with, or co-administer the compound with, a material to prevent its inactivation. For example, the therapeutic compound may be administered to a patient in an appropriate carrier, for example, liposomes, or a diluent. Pharmaceutically acceptable diluents include saline and aqueous buffer solutions. Liposomes include water-in-oil-in-water CGF emulsions as well as conventional liposomes (Strejan et al., 1984).
  • The therapeutic compound may also be administered parenterally, intraperitoneally, intraspinally, or intracerebrally. Dispersions can be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations may contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. In all cases, the composition must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (such as, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, sodium chloride, or polyalcohols such as mannitol and sorbitol, in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate or gelatin.
  • Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the therapeutic compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the therapeutic compound into a sterile carrier which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient (i.e., the therapeutic compound) plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • The therapeutic compound can be orally administered, for example, with an inert diluent or an assimilable edible carrier. The therapeutic compound and other ingredients may also be enclosed in a hard or soft shell gelatin capsule, compressed into tablets, or incorporated directly into the subject's diet. For oral therapeutic administration, the therapeutic compound may be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tablets, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like. The percentage of the therapeutic compound in the compositions and preparations may, of course, be varied. The amount of the therapeutic compound in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that a suitable dosage will be obtained.
  • It is especially advantageous to formulate parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subjects to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of therapeutic compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on (a) the unique characteristics of the therapeutic compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and (b) the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such a therapeutic compound for the treatment of a selected condition in a patient.
  • Active compounds are administered at a therapeutically effective dosage sufficient to treat a condition associated with a condition in a patient. A “therapeutically effective amount” preferably reduces the amount of symptoms of the condition in the infected patient by at least about 20%, more preferably by at least about 40%, even more preferably by at least about 60%, and still more preferably by at least about 80% relative to untreated subjects. For example, the efficacy of a compound can be evaluated in an animal model system that may be predictive of efficacy in treating the disease in humans, such as the model systems shown in the examples and drawings.
  • IX. Diseases and Conditions Requiring Bone Repair
  • The following is a brief discussion of several conditions to exemplify the variety of diseases and disorders that would benefit from the development of new technology to improve bone/cartilage repair and healing processes. In addition to the following, several other conditions, such as vitamin D deficiency, may also benefit from such treatments.
  • A. Fracture
  • The first example is the otherwise healthy individual who suffers a fracture. Often, clinical bone fracture is treated by casting to alleviate pain and allow natural repair mechanisms to repair the wound. There has been progress in the treatment of fracture in recent times, however, even without considering the various complications that may arise in treating fractured bones, any new procedures to increase bone healing in normal circumstances would be represent a great advance.
  • B. Osteogenesis Imperfecta
  • A second example which may benefit from new treatment methods is osteogenesis imperfecta (OI). OI encompasses various inherited connective tissue diseases that involve bone and soft connective tissue fragility in humans (Byers & Steiner, 1992; Prockop, 1990). About one child per 5,000-14,000 born is affected with OI and the disease is associated with significant morbidity throughout life. A certain number of deaths also occur, resulting from the high propensity for bone fracture and the deformation of abnormal bone after fracture repair (OI types II-IV; Bonadio & Goldstein, 1993). The relevant issue here is quality of life; clearly, the lives of affected individuals would be improved by the development of new therapies designed to stimulate and strengthen the fracture repair process.
  • OI type I is a mild disorder characterized by bone fracture without deformity, blue sclerae, normal or near normal stature, and autosomal dominant inheritance (Bonadio & Goldstein, 1993). Osteopenia is associated with an increased rate of lone bone fracture upon ambulation (the fracture frequency decreases dramatically at puberty and during young adult life, but increases once again in late middle age). Hearing loss, which often begins in the second or third decade, is a feature of this disease in about half the families and can progress despite the general decline in fracture frequency. Dentinogenesis imperfecta is observed in a subset of individuals.
  • In contrast, OI types II-VI represent a spectrum of more severe disorders associated with a shortened life-span. OI type II, the perinatal lethal form, is characterized by short stature, a soft calvarium, blue sclerae, fragile skin, a small chest, floppy appearing lower extremities (due to external rotation and abduction of the femurs), fragile tendons and ligaments, bone fracture with severe deformity, and death in the perinatal period due to respiratory insufficiency. Radiographic signs of bone weakness include compression of the femurs, bowing of the tibiae, broad and beaded ribs, and calvarial thinning
  • OI type III is characterized by short stature, a triangular facies, severe scoliosis, and bone fracture with moderate deformity. Scoliosis can lead to emphysema and a shortened life-span due to respiratory insufficiency. OI type IV is characterized by normal sclerae, bone fracture with mild to moderate deformity, tooth defects, and a natural history that essentially is intermediate between OI type II and OI type I.
  • More than 150 OI mutations have been characterized since 1989 (reviewed in Byers & Steiner, 1992; Prockop, 1990). The vast majority occur in the COL1A1 and COL1A2 genes of type I collagen. Most cases of OI type I appear to result from heterozygous mutations in the COL1A1 gene that decrease collagen production but do not alter primary structure, i.e., heterozygous null mutations affect COL1A1 expression.
  • C. Osteoporosis
  • A third, important example is osteoporosis. The term osteoporosis refers to a heterogeneous group of disorders characterized by decreased bone mass and fractures. An estimated 20-25 million people are at increased risk for fracture because of site-specific bone loss. Risk factors for osteoporosis include increasing age, gender (more females), low bone mass, early menopause, race (Caucasians), low calcium intake, reduced physical activity, genetic factors, environmental factors (including cigarette smoking and abuse of alcohol or caffeine), and deficiencies in neuromuscular control that create a propensity to fall.
  • More than a million fractures in the USA each year can be attributed to osteoporosis, and in 1986 alone the treatment of osteoporosis cost an estimated 7-10 billion health care dollars. Demographic trends (i.e., the gradually increasing age of the U.S. population) suggest that these costs may increase to $62 billion by the year 2020. Clearly, osteoporosis is a significant health care problem.
  • Clinically, osteoporosis is segregated into type I and type II. Type I osteoporosis occurs predominantly in middle aged women and is associated with estrogen loss at the menopause, while osteoporosis type II is associated with advancing age. Much of the morbidity and mortality associated with osteoporosis results from immobilization of elderly patients following fracture.
  • Current therapies for osteoporosis patients focus on fracture prevention, not fracture repair. This remains an important consideration because of the literature, which clearly states that significant morbidity and mortality are associated with prolonged bed rest in the elderly, particularly those who have suffered hip fractures. Complications of bed rest include blood clots and pneumonia. These complications are recognized and measures are usually taken to avoid them, but these is hardly the best approach to therapy. thus, the osteoporotic patient population would benefit from new therapies designed to strengthen bone and speed up the fracture repair process, thus getting these people on their feet before the complications arise.
  • D. Osteoarthritis
  • Current estimations suggest that 40 million Americans of all ages are affected by osteoarthritis and that 70 to 90 percent of Americans older than 75 years have at least one involved joint. Estimates of the prevalence of osteoarthritis based on radiographic evidence range from 30 to 90 percent. Men and women are equally affected, but symptoms occur earlier and appear to be more severe in women. Common synonyms for osteoarthritis include osteoarthrosis and degenerative joint disease. Osteoarthritis is not an inevitable consequence of aging. It is an acquired degenerative process that can be managed effectively by family physicians.
  • The exact etiology of osteoarthritis is unknown. Multiple factors (e.g., heredity, trauma, and obesity) interact to cause this disorder. Any event that changes the environment of the chondrocyte has the potential to cause osteoarthritis. Although usually occurring as a primary disorder, osteoarthritis can occur secondary to other processes. Although the term “osteoarthritis” is often used, “osteoarthrosis” may be more appropriate. Degenerative changes are the predominant factor contributing to disability. In joints with osteoarthritis, inflammation may be present; however, it is usually mild and involves only the periarticular tissues.
  • The pathophysiology involves a combination of mechanical, cellular, and biochemical processes. The interaction of these processes leads to changes in the composition and mechanical properties of the articular cartilage. Cartilage is composed of water, collagen, and proteoglycans. In healthy cartilage, continual internal remodeling occurs as the chondrocytes replace macromolecules lost through degradation. This process becomes disrupted in osteoarthritis, leading to increased degenerative changes and an abnormal repair response.
  • Joint use provides physiologic stimulation through the noncellular matrix that helps direct chondrocyte synthetic activity and internal tissue remodeling. Prolonged decreased joint use leads to changes in the matrix composition, resulting in subsequent loss of tissue function. The resumption of joint use can help restore the properties of the joint toward normal.
  • The strong association between age and osteoarthritis may be best explained by age-related changes in the matrix composition and a decrease in chondrocyte function and responsiveness to stimuli. These changes can interfere with continued internal remodeling, maintenance of the tissue, and loss of cartilage. This leads to an increased risk for cartilage degradation and injury to include surface defects in the articular cartilage. The abnormal repair process leads to the formation of osteophytes and subchondral cysts as the disease progresses. These changes are evident on radiographs.
  • Primary and secondary prevention should be emphasized in the management of patients with osteoarthritis. Maintaining appropriate body weight may be the single most important factor in preventing osteoarthritis from occurring in weight-bearing joints.8 A relationship has been shown between weight loss and a reduction in the risk of developing osteoarthritis.
  • The role of exercise in the development of osteoarthritis has been difficult to ascertain for a variety of reasons. Results of studies have demonstrated radiographic evidence of osteoarthritis in former athletes. In some of these studies, the symptoms were greater in the athletes than in the control subjects, while in other studies, the athletes were either asymptomatic or had symptoms similar to those of the control subjects. However, results from case-control and long-term prospective studies of runners have demonstrated that distance running does not increase the risk for osteoarthritis. Nevertheless, it is clear that a history of significant injury, particularly of the knee or hip, is a risk factor for the development of osteoarthritis. A history of menisectomy is also considered a risk factor; therefore, sports that have a high risk for injury may lead to a greater risk for the development of osteoarthritis. High-risk sports include collision sports and those with a high-loading or torsional impact.
  • In general, mild-to-moderate activity is not likely to lead to osteoarthritis in normal joints. Persons with previous joint injury or surgery, or abnormal joint alignment, are likely to be at a higher risk for developing osteoarthritis.
  • Vitamin D intake may also affect osteoarthritis. Low dietary intake or serum levels of vitamin D are associated with increased rates of progression.
  • The diagnosis of osteoarthritis is largely made by obtaining a detailed history and conducting a complete physical examination. Ancillary diagnostic tests may occasionally be necessary when the diagnosis remains uncertain. The usual presenting symptom is pain involving one or only a few joints. Joint involvement is usually symmetric. Morning joint stiffness that usually resolves within 30 minutes or occurs with mild-to-moderate activity is also common. As the disease progresses, prolonged joint stiffness and joint enlargement are evident. Crepitus, or a grating sensation in the joint, is a late manifestation. Limitation of joint movement may be due to flexion contractures or mechanical obstructions.
  • Secondary causes should be considered when making decisions about having ancillary tests performed. Further evaluation is indicated when the diagnosis remains uncertain, response to therapy is not as expected, or significant clinical changes occur. Clinically indicated laboratory work may include tests for erythrocyte sedimentation rate and rheumatoid factor. Synovial fluid analysis may be conducted to help exclude other diagnoses. In osteoarthritis, the white blood cell count is usually less than 500 cells per mm2 (0.5 3 109 per L) and is composed predominantly of mononuclear cells. In inflammatory aspirates, the white blood cell count is usually greater than 2,000 cells per mm2 (2.0 3 109 per L), and the predominant cell type is usually the neutrophil.
  • Radiographs can provide objective evidence of the disease. Findings consistent with osteoarthritis include presence of joint space narrowing, osteophyte formation, pseudocyst in subchondral bone, and increased density of subchondral bone. The absence of radiographic changes, however, does not exclude the diagnosis of osteoarthritis. Many patients with radiographic changes consistent with osteoarthritis are asymptomatic or do not exhibit any disability, suggesting that the presence of radiographic changes in the absence of symptoms should not lead to the diagnosis of osteoarthritis. In large joints, radiographs can exclude other causes of joint pain.
  • Radiographs are not required for every person who presents with symptoms consistent with osteoarthritis. Patients whose clinical history or course suggests other etiologies should undergo radiographic evaluation. This includes patients with trauma, joint pain at night, progressive joint pain (without prior radiography), significant family history of inflammatory arthritis, and children younger than 18 years.
  • The primary goals of treatment are improved function and quality of life. Treatment should be tailored to the needs of the individual patient. Patient education, rehabilitation, exercise, modification of activities of daily living, pharmacotherapy, alternative medicine and surgery are all treatment modalities that should be considered.
  • Patients should be thoroughly educated about the natural course of osteoarthritis. Their role in the management of the disease is critical, and a proper understanding will allow appropriate expectations of treatment to be established. Family physicians should be familiar with pharmacologic and nonpharmacologic treatment modalities to maximize effective utilization and a thorough understanding of the short- and long-term complications and cost. Some treatment modalities (e.g., heat, ice, and electrical stimulation) may make the patient feel better but may not be sufficient alone. Most modalities and therapies do not change the outcome.
  • Combinations of treatment modalities for symptom control are better than isolated therapy for symptom relief. The proper mix of modalities and exercises is based on individualized treatment goals agreed on by the family physician and the patient.
  • Patients with osteoarthritis often demonstrate significant disability. The symptoms and disability may limit their ability to participate in regular physical activity, and they may also be reluctant to exercise for fear that it will exacerbate their symptoms. It has been shown that aerobic and resistance exercises do not exacerbate symptoms in patients with osteoarthritis and do not appear to produce or exacerbate joint symptoms in persons without osteoarthritis. Results of randomized studies have demonstrated that aerobic and resistance exercises produce only modest gains in measures of improving disability, physical performance, and symptoms. Participation in regular exercise appears to be safe and effective in managing the symptoms and disability associated with osteoarthritis. Exercise programs such as those sponsored by the Arthritis Foundation should be recommended to patients with osteoarthritis. It is important for patients to note that any lifestyle changes they make are not curative and must be continued throughout life.
  • Pain is the primary symptom of osteoarthritis, and multiple medications are available to relieve pain and improve function. The choice of a pain-control medication must be individualized, prescribing medications with the best side effect profile first and adding other pain-control medications as indicated. In comparison with nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), acetaminophen, in a dosage of 1 g four times daily, is considered an initial drug of choice. NSAIDs and aspirin have analgesic and anti-inflammatory properties but also have adverse effects on the stomach and kidney, especially in elderly patients. The cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors celecoxib (Celebrex) and rofecoxib (Vioxx) cause fewer gastrointestinal side effects and, while thought to be no more effective then other NSAIDs, can be considered for use in patients with a history of gastrointestinal bleeding or those who may be taking certain medications (e.g., warfarin [Coumadin] or oral steroids). The COX-2 inhibitors have not been shown to be safer than acetaminophen. Cost should be a consideration in treatment decisions. In addition, there is accumulating data about the side effects of the COX-2 inhibitors. Early evidence indicated that side effects might vary between the medications in this class.
  • Sodium hyaluronate (Synvisc, Hyalgan) is indicated only for the treatment of patients with osteoarthritis of the knee. This treatment is an alternative to consider in patients who do not respond to NSAID therapy or who have a history of gastric ulcer disease, with some evidence suggesting symptomatic and functional improvement following a series of weekly injections.
  • Intra-articular steroid injections are another treatment option but should not, in most circumstances, be administered more than three to four times per year. Results of a multicenter, randomized study demonstrated that intra-articular knee injections significantly reduced pain for up to four weeks. No functional improvement was noted compared to placebo. Results from this same study revealed that joint lavage significantly relieved pain for up to 24 weeks. The effects of steroid injection and joint lavage on pain relief were additive, but neither procedure significantly improved functional status. Topical capsaicin cream should be considered for adjunctive treatment of focal joint pain.
  • Alternative medicines (e.g., glucosamine sulfate, chondroitin sulfate) in the prevention and treatment of osteoarthritis continue to receive coverage in the media; however, research evaluating their efficacy and potential benefits is incomplete. Glucosamine sulfate, a popular treatment for osteoarthritis, is an amino-monosaccharide and a substrate of glycosaminoglycans and proteoglycans. These are substrates of hyaluronic acid, a major component of joint fluid. Glucosamine is often taken alone or in combination with chondroitin sulfate. Results from some studies have shown glucosamine to be as effective as ibuprofen in relieving the pain of osteoarthritis. Chondroitin sulfate also has demonstrated efficacy in improving the symptoms of osteoarthritis. A full review of alternative treatment modalities is beyond the scope of this article.
  • Family physicians should be aware of commonly used alternative treatments. This allows monitoring of potential benefits and possible interactions with other medications. An awareness of the medical literature also permits physicians to provide evidence-based recommendations for individual patient therapeutic trials. Alternative care should be critically assessed like any other medical care. It is through such assessments that a medication such as capsaicin, which is derived from the red pepper plant, has become part of conventional medicine.
  • E. Bone Reconstruction
  • A fourth example is related to bone reconstruction and, specifically, the ability to reconstruct defects in bone tissue that result from traumatic injury; as a consequence of cancer or cancer surgery; as a result of a birth defect; or as a result of aging. There is a significant need for more frequent orthopedic implants, and cranial and facial bone are particular targets for this type of reconstructive need. The availability of new implant materials, e.g., titanium, has permitted the repair of relatively large defects. Titanium implants provide excellent temporary stability across bony defects. However, experience has shown that a lack of viable bone bridging the defect can result in exposure of the appliance, infection, structural instability and, ultimately, failure to repair the defect.
  • Autologous bone grafts are another possibility, but they have several demonstrated disadvantages in that they must be harvested from a donor site such as iliac crest or rib, they usually provide insufficient bone to completely fill the defect, and the bone that does form is sometimes prone to infection and resorption. Partially purified xenogeneic preparations are not practical for clinical use because microgram quantities are purified from kilograms of bovine bone, making large scale commercial production both costly and impractical. Allografts and demineralized bone preparations are therefore often employed.
  • Microsurgical transfers of free bone grafts with attached soft tissue and blood vessels can close bony defects with an immediate source of blood supply to the graft. However, these techniques are time consuming, have been shown to produce a great deal of morbidity, and can only be used by specially trained individuals. Furthermore, the bone implant is often limited in quantity and is not readily contoured. In the mandible, for example, the majority of patients cannot wear dental appliances using presently accepted techniques (even after continuity is established), and thus gain little improvement in the ability to masticate. Toriumi et al. 1991 have written the “Reconstructive surgeons should have at their disposal a bone substitute that would be reliable, biocompatible, easy to use, and long lasting and that would restore mandibular continuity with little associated morbidity.”
  • In connection with bone reconstruction, specific problem areas for improvement are those concerned with treating large defects, such as created by trauma, birth defects, or particularly, following tumor resection; and also the area of artificial joints. The success of orthopaedic implants, interfaces and artificial joints could conceivably be improved if the surface of the implant, or a functional part of an implant, were to be coated with a bone stimulatory agent. The surface of implants could be coated with one or more appropriate materials in order to promote a more effective interaction with the biological site surrounding the implant and, ideally, to promote tissue repair.
  • X. Polymers for Implanting of Bone Cell Spheroids
  • Over the last decade there has been a tremendous increase in applications for polymeric materials. These materials are well suited to implantation as they can serve as a temporary scaffold to be replaced by host tissue, degrade by hydrolysis to non-toxic products, and be excreted, as described by Kulkarni et al. (1971) and Hollinger and Battistone (1986).
  • Either natural or synthetic polymers can be used to form the matrix, although synthetic polymers are preferred for reproducibility and controlled release kinetics. Synthetic polymers that can be used include bioerodible polymers such as poly(lactide) (PLA), poly(glycolic acid) (PGA), poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (PLGA), and other poly(alpha-hydroxy acids), poly(caprolactone), polycarbonates, polyamides, polyanhydrides, polyamino acids, polyortho esters, polyacetals, polycyanoacrylates and degradable polyurethanes, and non-erodible polymers such as polyacrylates, ethylene-vinyl acetate polymers and other acyl substituted cellulose acetates and derivatives thereof, non-erodible polyurethanes, polystyrenes, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl fluoride, poly(vinyl imidazole), chlorosulphonated polyolifins, polyethylene oxide, polyvinyl alcohol, and nylon. Although non-degradable materials can be used to form the matrix or a portion of the matrix, they are not preferred. Examples of natural polymers include proteins such as albumin, fibrin or fibrinogen, collagen, synthetic polyamino acids, and prolamines, and polysaccharides such as alginate, heparin, and other naturally occurring biodegradable polymers of sugar units.
  • Four polymers widely used in medical applications are poly(paradioxanone) (PDS), poly(lactic acid) (PLA), poly(glycolic acid) (PGA), and PLAGA copolymers. Copolymerization enables modulation of the degradation time of the material. By changing the ratios of crystalline to amorphous polymers during polymerization, properties of the resulting material can be altered to suit the needs of the application. These polymers, including poly(lactide-co-glycolic) acid (PLGA), have been used as polymer composites for bone replacement as reported by Elgendy et al. (1993). Substituted polyphosphazenes have been shown to support osteogenic cell growth, as reported by Laurencin et al. (1993). Poly(organophosphazenes) are high molecular weight polymers containing a backbone of alternating phosphorus and nitrogen atoms. There are a wide variety of polyphosphazenes, each derived from the same precursor polymer, poly(dichlorophosphazene). The chlorine-substituted species can be modified by replacement of the chlorine atoms by different organic nucleophiles such as o-methylphenoxide along with amino acids. The physical and chemical properties of the polymer can be altered by adding various ratios of hydrolytic sensitive side chains such as ethyl glycinate, as described by Wade et al. (1978) and Allcock and Fuller (1981). This will affect the degradation of the polymer as an implantable and biodegradable material as well as vary the support of osteogenic cells for bone and tissue implants, as shown by Laruencin et al. (1993).
  • PLA, PGA and PLA/PGA copolymers are particularly useful for forming the biodegradable matrices. PLA polymers are usually prepared from the cyclic esters of lactic acids. Both L(+) and D(−) forms of lactic acid can be used to prepare the PLA polymers, as well as the optically inactive DL-lactic acid mixture of D(−) and L(+) lactic acids. Methods of preparing polylactides are well documented in the patent literature. The following U.S. patents, the teachings of which are hereby incorporated by reference, describe in detail suitable polylactides, their properties and their preparation: U.S. Pat. Nos. 1,995,970; 2,703,316; 2,758,987; 2,951,828; 2,676,945; 2,683,136; and 3,531,561. PGA is the homopolymer of glycolic acid (hydroxyacetic acid). In the conversion of glycolic acid to poly(glycolic acid), glycolic acid is initially reacted with itself to form the cyclic ester glycolide, which in the presence of heat and a catalyst is converted to a high molecular weight linear-chain polymer. PGA polymers and their properties are described in more detail in “Cyanamid Research Develops World's First Synthetic Absorbable Suture,” Chemistry and Industry, 905 (1970).
  • The erosion of the matrix is related to the molecular weights of PLA, PGA or PLA/PGA. The higher molecular weights, weight average molecular weights of 90,000 or higher, result in polymer matrices which retain their structural integrity for longer periods of time; while lower molecular weights, weight average molecular weights of 30,000 or less, result in both slower release and shorter matrix lives. Poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (50:50), degrades in about six weeks following implantation.
  • All polymers for use in the matrix must meet the mechanical and biochemical parameters necessary to provide adequate support for the cells with subsequent growth and proliferation. The polymers can be characterized with respect to mechanical properties such as tensile strength using an Instron tester, for polymer molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC), glass transition temperature by differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) and bond structure by infrared (IR) spectroscopy, with respect to toxicology by initial screening tests involving Ames assays and in vitro teratogenicity assays, and implantation studies in animals for immunogenicity, inflammation, release and degradation studies.
  • These polymers are particularly useful in forming fibrous or sponge type matrices for implantation. Polymers can also be used to form hydrogels in which the cells are suspended and then implanted.
  • A. Other Matrix Materials
  • Another class of materials for making the matrix is hydroxyapatite, or a similar ceramic formed of tricalcium phosphate (TCP) or calcium phosphate (CaPO4). Calcium hydroxyapatites occur naturally as geological deposits and in normal biological tissues, principally bone, cartilage, enamel, dentin, and cementum of vertebrates and in many sites of pathological calcifications such as blood vessels and skin. Synthetic calcium hydroxyapatite is formed in the laboratory either as pure Ca10(PO4)6(OH)2 or hydroxyapatite that is impure, containing other ions such as carbonate, fluoride, chloride for example, or crystals deficient in calcium or crystals in which calcium is partly or completely replaced by other ions such as barium, strontium and lead. Essentially none of the geological and biological apatites are “pure” hydroxyapatite since they contain a variety of other ions and cations and may have different ratios of calcium to phosphorous than the pure synthetic apatites.
  • In general, the crystals of pure synthetic apatites, geological apatites and many impure synthetically produced apatites are larger and more crystalline than the biological crystals of bone, dentin, cementum and cartilage. The crystals of bone, dentin and cementum are very small, irregularly shaped, very thin plates whose rough average dimensions are approximately 10 to 50 angstroms in thickness, 30 to 150 angstroms in width, and 200 to 600 angstroms in length. The synthetic materials are highly diverse, as reported in the literature. For example, the characterization of four commercial apatites was reported by Pinholt et al. (1992); Marden et al. (1990) reports on a protein, biodegradable material; Pinholt et al. (1991) reports on the use of a bovine bone material called Bio-Oss™; Friedman et al. (1991) and Costantino et al. (1991) report on a hydroxyapatite cement; Roesgen (1990) reports on the use of calcium phosphate ceramics in combination with autogenic bone; Ono et al. (1990) reports on the use of apatite-wollastonite containing glass ceramic granules, hydroxyapatite granules, and alumina granules; Passuti et al. (1989) reports on macroporous calcium phosphate ceramic performance; Harada (1989) reports on the use of a mixture of hydroxyapatite particles and tricalcium phosphate powder for bone implantation; Ohgushi et al. (1989) reports on the use of porous calcium phosphate ceramics alone and in combination with bone marrow cells; Pochon et al. (1986) reports on the use of beta-tricalcium phosphate for implantation; and Glowacki et al. (1985), reports on the use of demineralized bone implants.
  • As used herein, all of these materials are generally referred to as “hydroxyapatite.” In the preferred form, the hydroxyapatite is particles having a diameter between approximately ten and 100 microns in diameter, most preferably about 50 microns in diameter.
  • Calcium phosphate ceramics can be used as implants in the repair of bone defects because these materials are non-toxic, non-immunogenic, and are composed of calcium and phosphate ions, the main constituents of bone (Frame, 1987; Parsons et al., 1988). Both tricalcium phosphate (TCP) Ca3(PO4)2 and hydroxyapatite (HA) Ca10(PO4)6(OH2) have been widely used. Calcium phosphate implants are osteoinductive, and have the apparent ability to become directly bonded to bone. As a result, a strong bone-implant interface is created.
  • Calcium phosphate ceramics have a degree of bioresorbability which is governed by their chemistry and material structure. High density HA and TCP implants exhibit little resorption, while porous ones are more easily broken down by dissolution in body fluids and resorbed by phagocytosis. However, TCP degrades more quickly than HA structures of the same porosity in vitro. HA is relatively insoluble in aqueous environments. However, the mechanical properties of calcium phosphate ceramics make them ill-suited to serve as a structural element under load bearing circumstances. Ceramics are not preferred since they are brittle and have low resistance to impact loading.
  • B. Polymers for Forming Hydrogels
  • Polymers that can form ionic hydrogels which are malleable can also be used to support the cells. Injecting a suspension of cells in a polymer solution may be performed to improve the reproducibility of cell seeding throughout a device, to protect the cells from shear forces or pressure induced necrosis, or to aid in defining the spatial location of cell delivery. The injectable polymer may also be utilized to deliver ells and promote the formation of new tissue without the use of any other matrix. In a preferred embodiment, the hydrogel is produced by cross-linking the ionic salt of a polymer with ions, whose strength increases with either increasing concentrations of ions or polymer. The polymer solution is mixed with the cells to be implanted to form a suspension, which is then injected directly into a patient prior to polymerization of the suspension. The suspension subsequently polymerizes over a short period of time due to the presence in vivo of physiological concentrations of ions such as calcium in the case where the polymer is a polysaccharide such as alginate.
  • A hydrogel is defined as a substance formed when an organic polymer (natural or synthetic) is cross-linked via covalent, ionic, or hydrogen bonds to create a three-dimensional open-lattice structure which entraps water molecules to form a gel. Examples of materials which can be used to form a hydrogel include polysaccharides such as alginate, polyphosphazenes, and polyacrylates such as hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA), which are crosslinked ionically, or block copolymers such as Pluronics™ or Tetronics™, polyethylene oxide-polypropylene glycol block copolymers which are crosslinked by temperature or pH, respectively. Other materials include proteins such as fibrinogin, collagen, polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, hyaluronic acid and collagen.
  • In general, these polymers are at least partially soluble in aqueous solutions, such as water, buffered salt solutions, or aqueous alcohol solutions, that have charged side groups, or a monovalent ionic salt thereof. Examples of polymers with acidic side groups that can be reacted with cations are poly(phosphazenes), poly(acrylic acids), poly(methacrylic acids), copolymers of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, poly(vinyl acetate), and sulfonated polymers, such as sulfonated polystyrene. Copolymers having acidic side groups formed by reaction of acrylic or methacrylic acid and vinyl ether monomers or polymers can also be used. Examples of acidic groups are carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, halogenated (preferably fluorinated) alcohol groups, phenolic OH groups, and acidic OH groups. Examples of polymers with basic side groups that can be reacted with anions are poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinyl pyridine), poly(vinyl imidazole), and some imino substituted polyphosphazenes. The ammonium or quaternary salt of the polymers can also be formed from the backbone nitrogens or pendant imino groups. Examples of basic side groups are amino and imino groups.
  • Alginate can be ionically cross-linked with divalent cations, in water, at room temperature, to form a hydrogel matrix. Due to these mild conditions, alginate has been the most commonly used polymer for hybridoma cell encapsulation, as described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,352,883. Described therein is an aqueous solution containing the biological materials to be encapsulated is suspended in a solution of a water soluble polymer, the suspension is formed into droplets which are configured into discrete microcapsules by contact with multivalent cations, then the surface of the microcapsules is crosslinked with polyamino acids to form a semipermeable membrane around the encapsulated materials.
  • The polyphosphazenes suitable for cross-linking have a majority of side chain groups which are acidic and capable of forming salt bridges with di- or trivalent cations. Examples of preferred acidic side groups are carboxylic acid groups and sulfonic acid groups. Hydrolyrically stable polyphosphazenes are formed of monomers having carboxylic acid side groups that are crosslinked by divalent or trivalent cations such as Ca2+ or Al3+. Polymers can be synthesized that degrade by hydrolysis by incorporating monomers having imidazole, amino acid ester, or glycerol side groups. Bioerodible polyphosphazenes have at least two differing types of side chains, acidic side groups capable of forming salt bridges with multivalent cations, and side groups that hydrolyze under in vivo conditions, e.g., imidazole groups, amino acid esters, glycerol and glucosyl.
  • The water soluble polymer with charged side groups is crosslinked by reacting the polymer with an aqueous solution containing multivalent ions of the opposite charge, either multivalent cations if the polymer has acidic side groups or multivalent anions if the polymer has basic side groups. The preferred cations for cross-linking of the polymers with acidic side groups to form a hydrogel are divalent and trivalent cations such as copper, calcium, aluminum, magnesium, strontium, barium, and tin, although di-, tri- or tetra-functional organic cations such as alkylammonium salts can also be used. Aqueous solutions of the salts of these cations are added to the polymers to form soft, highly swollen hydrogels and membranes. The higher the concentration of cation, or the higher the valence, the greater the degree of cross-linking of the polymer. Concentrations from as low as 0.005M have been demonstrated to cross-link the polymer. Higher concentrations are limited by the solubility of the salt. The preferred anions for cross-linking of the polymers to form a hydrogel are divalent and trivalent anions such as low molecular weight dicarboxylic acids, for example, terepthalic acid, sulfate ions and carbonate ions. Aqueous solutions of the salts of these anions are added to the polymers to form soft, highly swollen hydrogels and membranes, as described with respect to cations.
  • A variety of polycations can be used to complex and thereby stabilize the polymer hydrogel into a semi-permeable surface membrane. Examples of materials that can be used include polymers having basic reactive groups such as amine or imine groups, having a preferred molecular weight between 3,000 and 100,000, such as polyethylenimine and polylysine. These are commercially available. One polycation is poly(L-lysine), examples of synthetic polyamines are: polyethyleneimine, poly(vinylamine), and poly(allyl amine). There are also natural polycations such as the polysaccharide, chitosan. Polyanions that can be used to form a semi-permeable membrane by reaction with basic surface groups on the polymer hydrogel include polymers and copolymers of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, and other derivatives of acrylic acid, polymers with pendant SO3H groups such as sulfonated polystyrene, and polystyrene with carboxylic acid groups.
  • XI. Examples
  • The following examples are included to demonstrate preferred embodiments of the invention. It should be appreciated by those of skill in the art that the techniques disclosed in the examples which follow represent techniques discovered by the inventor to function well in the practice of the invention, and thus can be considered to constitute preferred modes for its practice. However, those of skill in the art should, in light of the present disclosure, appreciate that many changes can be made in the specific embodiments which are disclosed and still obtain a like or similar result without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • Example 1 Materials and Methods
  • Neonatal Murine Calvarial Bone Formation Assay.
  • The technique for studying organ cultures of neonatal murine calvarial bones has been described in detail previously (Traianedes et al., 1999, Mundy et al., 1999). The bones were removed from the calvaria of 4-5 day old ICR Swiss mice, and then cultured in BGJ medium with 0.1% BSA for 7 Days using 4 calvarial bones per group. triterpenoids in differing amounts were added for 7 days. Alkaline phosphatase was determined at 4 and 7 days and expressed as arbitrary units of alkaline phosphatase activity. At the end of the experiment the media was saved and assayed for the presence of alkaline phosphatase and the calvaria bones were then fixed overnight in 10% formalin, decalcified in 14% EDTA overnight and were then embedded in paraffin wax. Sections were cut, using a standard microtome, along the midline suture to reveal the sagittal suture and the region posterior to this suture. Four micrometer sections were taken initially and at two sequential 400 nm depths. Sections were placed on coated glass slides (Superfrost plus, Fisher Scientific, Pittsburgh, Pa.) and stained with hematoxylin and eosin. The effects on bone formation were evaluated by morphologic assessment.
  • Imaging.
  • Digital images across sections of the neonatal murine calvaria were taken from each group. Histomorphometric analysis was performed on these calvarial images using the Osteomeasure System (Osteometrics Inc., Atlanta, Ga.). The total and new bone area (expressed as mm2×10−3) was determined on all images across the calvarial section.
  • Bovine Calf Stifle Joint SZP Assay.
  • Bovine calf stifle joints were dissected under aseptic conditions. The superficial zone of articular cartilage of femoral condyles (approximately 100 μm thickness) was harvested using a dermatome. The cartilage slices were digested with 0.2% collagenase P in culture medium. Isolated chondrocytes were plated in monolayer at a density of 1×105 cells/well (approximately 2.5×104 cells/cm2) in 12-well culture plates and incubated at 37° C. in a moist atmosphere of 5% carbon dioxide and 95% air. Chondrocytes were cultured in D-MEM/F-12 containing 10% fetal bovine serum over night, and then the media were changed in serum-free D-MEM/F-12 supplemented with ITSL (insulin, transferrin, selenious acid, and linoleic acid). Both media contain 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 μg/ml streptomycin, 50 μg/ml ascorbate-2phosphate, and 0.1% bovine serum albumin. After changing the media with serum into the serum-free chemically defined media, various concentration of synthetic triterpenoids were added into the cell culture.
  • As most of SZP is secreted into the culture medium, supernatants were harvested as samples and the SZP synthesis was analyzed by SDS-PAGE and Western blotting using a monoclonal antibody 56.79, obtained from Rush Medical College, Chicago, Ill. SZP accumulation into the culture medium was also quantified by ELISA using purified SZP as standard.
  • The accumulation of SZP into the culture media increased in a time-dependent manner (Day 1<Day 2<Day 3). Therefore the culture of media of Day 3 was used for all the studies.
  • Example 2 Calvarial Bone Formation Results
  • Experimental groupings for FIGS. 1-12 are shown below (The alphabet at the end of each compound number denotes synthesis batch of each one.):
  • Gp1—Control
    Gp2—TP-151F 40 Nm
    Gp3—TP-151F 200 nM
    Gp4—TP-151F 1000 nM
    Gp5—Control
    Gp6—TP-155C 40 nM
    Gp7—TP-155C 200 nM
    Gp8—TP-155C 1000 nM
    Gp9—Control
    Gp10—TP-235H 40 nM
    Gp11—TP-235H 200 nM
    Gp12—TP-235H 1000 nM
    Gp13—Control
    Gp14—TP-319A 40 nM
    Gp15—TP-319A 200 nM
    Gp16—TP-319A 100 nM

    Results were expressed as new bone formation and alkaline phosphatase in the media at 4 and 7 days. Midshaft transverse fractures were induced in all animals. Fractures were tolerated and remained immobilized without surgical complications. Animals were freely mobile after recovery from anesthesia. Callus formation was observed on radiographic examination by 2 weeks in all animals. The animals were euthanized at 3 weeks and callus formation and the biomechanical strength of the bones assessed
  • TP-151.
  • Significant increase in new bone formation (FIG. 1) with increases in alkaline phosphatase in the calvarial culture media (FIG. 2). No evidence of cartilage formation was seen in these cultures (FIG. 3). This indicates this agent is capable of stimulating bone formation, however no cartilage formation was seen.
  • TP-155.
  • Significant increase in new bone formation (FIG. 4) with increases in alkaline phosphatase in the calvarial culture media (FIG. 5). Some evidence of cartilage formation was seen in these cultures (FIG. 3) however this was not significant. This indicates this agent is capable of stimulating bone formation and possibly cartilage formation.
  • TP-235.
  • Significant increase in new bone formation at 40 nM (FIG. 7) however really no convincing change in alkaline phosphatase in the calvarial culture media (FIG. 8). No evidence of cartilage formation was seen in these cultures (FIG. 9) however this was not significant.
  • TP-319.
  • Some increases in new bone formation (FIG. 10) and there was also dose responsive increases in alkaline phosphatase in the calvarial culture media (FIG. 11). There was clear evidence increases in cartilage formation was seen in these cultures (FIG. 12).
  • Example 3 Articular Cartilage Results
  • TGF-β1.
  • Recombinant human TGF-β1 was found to up-regulate SZP synthesis in a dose-dependent manner (0.4-120 pM).
  • Triterpenoids at Higher Concentrations.
  • All four triterpenoids tested, TP-151, TP-155, TP-235, and TP-319, down-regulated SZP synthesis in a dose-dependent manner at high concentrations (100-1000 nM). Concurrent treatment with TGF-β1 (4 pM) also demonstrated the same trend.
  • Triterpenoids at Lower Concentrations.
  • TP-151 and TP-155 up-regulated SZP synthesis at lower concentrations, with SZP synthesis increasing as the concentration of these two triterpenoids was increased from 0.01 to 1 nM. TP-235 and TP-319 had no obvious effects in this range.
  • The results suggest that sub-nanomolar concentrations concentration were optimal for articular cartilage.
  • All of the compositions and/or methods disclosed and claimed herein can be made and executed without undue experimentation in light of the present disclosure. While the compositions and methods of this invention have been described in terms of preferred embodiments, it will be apparent to those of skill in the art that variations may be applied to the compositions and/or methods and in the steps or in the sequence of steps of the method described herein without departing from the concept, spirit and scope of the invention. More specifically, it will be apparent that certain agents which are both chemically and physiologically related may be substituted for the agents described herein while the same or similar results would be achieved. All such similar substitutes and modifications apparent to those skilled in the art are deemed to be within the spirit, scope and concept of the invention as defined by the appended claims.
  • REFERENCES
  • The following references, to the extent that they provide exemplary procedural or other details supplementary to those set forth herein, are specifically incorporated herein by reference.
    • U.S. Pat. No. 1,995,970
    • U.S. Pat. No. 2,676,945
    • U.S. Pat. No. 2,683,136
    • U.S. Pat. No. 2,703,316
    • U.S. Pat. No. 2,758,987
    • U.S. Pat. No. 2,951,828
    • U.S. Pat. No. 3,531,561
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,352,883
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,443,546
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,533,637
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,013,649
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,643,736
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,703
    • U.S. Patent Publn. US2003/0232786
    • EP 128 733
    • EP 273 085
    • EP 481 791
    • WO 93/98826
    • WO 95/06112
    • Allcock & Fuller, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 103:2250-2256, 1981.
    • Amstutz et al., Helv. Chim. Acta., 70:2232-2244, 1987.
    • Aubin et al., J. of Cell Biol., 92:452-461, 1982.
    • Baichwal and Sugden, In: Gene Transfer; Plenum Press, NY, 117-148, 1986.
    • Barnard et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta., 1032:79-87, 1990.
    • Barnes and Sam, Cell 22: 649-655, 1980.
    • Barnes, Bio Techniques 5: 534-542, 1987.
    • Benvenisty and Neshif, Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 83:9551-9555, 1986.
    • Bonadio and Goldstein, In: Molecular and Cellular Biology of Bone; Academic Press, San Diego, 169-189, 1993.
    • Bonewald & Mundy, Clin. Orthop., 250:261-276, 1990.
    • Bourrin et al., Endocrin., 141:3149-3155, 2000.
    • Broad, Boraston, and Rhodes, Cytotechnology 5:47-55, 1991.
    • Bruder and Caplan, Bone, 10:359-375, 1989.
    • Bruder and Caplan, Bone, 11:189-198, 1990.
    • Bruder et al., Trans. Ortho. Res. Soc., 16:58, 1991.
    • Bruland et al., Cancer Res, 48:5302-5308, 1988.
    • Byers and Steiner, Annu. Rev. Med. 43:269-289, 1992.
    • Cai et al., Helv. Chim. Acta., 78:732-757, 1995.
    • Cassady and Suffness, In: Anticancer Agents Based on Natural Product Models; Academic Press, New York, 254-269, 1980
    • Centrella, J. Biol. Chem. 262:2869-2874, 1987.
    • Charney, E. In: The Molecular Basis of Optical Activity; Wiley Interscience, New York, 167-191, 1979.
    • Chatterjee, et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci., 770:79-90, 1995.
    • Chaudhary & Avioli, Mol Cell Biochem 178:59-68, 1998.
    • Cheifetz et al., Cell 48, 409-415, 1987.
    • Chen and Okayama, Mol. Cell Biol., 7:2745-2752, 1987.
    • Chen and Weinberg, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 92:1565-1569, 1995.
    • Chen et al., Exp. Cell Res., 195:509, 1991.
    • Chen et al., Exp. Cell Res., 206:199, 1993.
    • Cheng et al., Endocrinology, 134:277, 1994.
    • Chung and Wasicak, Tetrahedron Lett., 31:3957-3960, 1990.
    • Clinton et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 83:1478-1491, 1961.
    • Coffin, In: Virology, Raven Press, New York, 1437-1500, 1990.
    • Conover & Bale, Exp. Cell Res., 238:122-127, 1998.
    • Conover, In: Principles of Bone Biology, Academic Press, New York, 607-626, 1996.
    • Corey and Ruden, Tetrahedron Lett., 1495-1499, 1973.
    • Costantino et al., Arch. Otolaryngol. Head Neck Surg. 117(4), 379-384, 1991.
    • Coupar et al., Gene, 68:1-10, 1988.
    • “Cynamid Research Develops World's First Synthetic Absorbable Suture,” Chemistry and Industry, 905, 1970.
    • de Martin et al., EMBO J. 6, 3673-3677, 1987.
    • Denker et al., Differentiation 59:25-34, 1995.
    • Denker, Differentiation 59:25-34, 1995.
    • Derynck et al., J. Biol. Chem. 261, 4377-4379, 1986.
    • Derynck et al., Nature 316,701-705, 1985.
    • Doctor et al., Dev. Biol. 151:591-505, 1992.
    • Dubensky et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 81:7529-7533, 1984.
    • Dunlop and Hall, Int. J. Dev. Biol., 39:357-371, 1995.
    • Elgendy et al., Biomaterials, 14, 263-269, 1993.
    • Elias, In: Principles and Techniques in Diagnostic Histopathology, Noyes Publication, Park Ridge, 248-250, 1982.
    • Embleton et al., Br J Cancer, 43:582-587, 1981.
    • Farley et al., Calc. Tiss. Res., 67:247-254, 2000.
    • Favaloro et al., J. Med. Chem., 45:4801-4805, 2002.
    • Fawthrop et al., J. Bone Miner. Res. 7:1363-1371, 1992.
    • Fechheimer et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 84:8463-8467, 1987.
    • Ferkol et al., FASEB J., 7:1081-1091, 1993.
    • Ferrari et al., J. Virol., 70:3227-3234, 1996.
    • Feyen et al., J. Biol. Chem., 266:19469-19474, 1991.
    • Finkbeiner and Stiles, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 85:616-622, 1963.
    • Fisher et al., J. Virol., 70:520-532, 1996.
    • Flotte et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 90:10613-10617, 1993.
    • Fraley et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 76:3348-3352, 1979.
    • Frame, Int J Oral Maxillofac Surg. 16(6):642-55, 1987.
    • Franceschi, J. Biol. Chem. 263:18938-18945, 1988.
    • Franceschi, J. Cell Physiol., 123:401-409, 1985.
    • Friedman et al., Arch. Otolaryngol. Head Neck Surg. 117(4), 386-389, 1991.
    • Gasmi et al., J. Virol., 73(3):1828-34, 1999.
    • Gerhart et al., Trans. Orthop. Res. Soc., 16:172, 1991.
    • Ghosh and Bachhawat, In: Liver diseases, targeted diagnosis and therapy using specific receptors and ligands, Marcel Dekker, New York, 87-104, 1991.
    • Glowacki et al., Clin. Plast. Surg. 12(2), 233-241, 1985.
    • Gomori, Am. J. Clin. Pathol., 20:661, 1950.
    • Goodman et al., Blood, 84:1492-1500, 1994.
    • Gopal, Mol. Cell Biol., 5:1188-1190, 1985.
    • Graham and Van Der Eb, Virology, 52:456-467, 1973.
    • Grieco and Speake, J. Org. Chem., 63:5929-5936, 1998.
    • Hall and Miyake, Anat. Embryol., 186:107-124, 1992.
    • Hall and Miyake, Int. J. Dev. Biol., 39:881-893, 1995.
    • Harada, Shikwa-Gakuho 89(2), 263-297, 1989.
    • Harlow & Lane, In: Using Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988.
    • Hay et al., J. Mol. Biol., 175:493-510, 1984.
    • Hayat, In: Principles and Techniques of Electron Microscopy: Biological Applications, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1989.
    • Hearing and Shenk, J. Mol. Biol. 167:809-822, 1983.
    • Hearing et al., J. Virol., 67:2555-2558, 1987.
    • Heiner et al., Cancer Res, 47:5377-5384, 1987.
    • Hidvegi et al., Osteoarthr. Cantil., 14(1):89-93, 2006.
    • Hollinger and Battistone, Clin. Orthopedics and Related Res., 207:290-305, 1986.
    • Honda et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 12:1027-1030, 2002.
    • Honda et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 19:2711-2714, 1998.
    • Honda et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 7:1623-1628, 1997.
    • Honda et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 9:3429-3434, 1999.
    • Honda et al., J. Med. Chem., 43:1866-1877, 2000a.
    • Honda et al., J. Med. Chem., 43:4233-4246, 2000b.
    • Honda et al., Org. Biomol. Chem., 1:4384-4391, 2003.
    • Honda et al., Org. Prep. Proced. Int., 37:546-550, 2005.
    • Hosoi et al., Cancer Res, 42:654-661, 1982.
    • Huang et al., Cancer Res., 54:5841-5847, 1994.
    • Huang et al., Cancer Res., 54:701-708, 1994.
    • Ignotz & Massague, J. Biol. Chem. 261:4337-4345, 1986.
    • Iguchi et al, J. Appl. Toxicol., 13(4):269-275, 1993.
    • Jayme, Cytotechnology 5(1):15-30, 1991.
    • Johnson et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 67:1745-1754, 1945.
    • Kahne, Tetrahedron Lett., 22:5011-5014, 1981.
    • Kaneda et al., Science, 243:375-378, 1989.
    • Kaplitt et al., Nat. Genet., 8:148-153, 1994.
    • Kato et al, J. Biol. Chem., 266:3361-3364, 1991.
    • Kerwin et al., J. Org. Chem., 52:1686-1695, 1987.
    • Kessler et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 93:14082-14087, 1996.
    • Kim et al., Calcif. Tissue Int., 59:58-63, 1996.
    • Kim et al., Nature, 362:841-844, 1993.
    • Kimura et al., Biomed. Res., 5:465, 1984.
    • Klein et al., Nature, 327:70-73, 1987.
    • Koeberl et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 94:1426-1431, 1997.
    • Kojima et al., J. Cell Biol., 113(6):1439-1445, 1991.
    • Komori et al., Cell 89:755-764, 1997.
    • Kowalski et al., J. Org. Chem., 57:7194-7208, 1992.
    • Kulkarni et al., J. Biomedical Materials Research, 5, 169-81, 1971.
    • Langille et al., Differentiation, 40:84, 1989.
    • Laurencin et al., J. Biom. Mater. Res., 27, 1993.
    • Lawson et al., Clin Chem, 31:381-385, 1985.
    • Levrero et al., Gene, 101:195-202, 1991.
    • Liby et al., Cancer Res., 65(11):4789-4798, 2005.
    • Lillie, Stain Technol., 15:17, 1940.
    • Liotta et al., J. Org. Chem., 46:2920-2923, 1981.
    • Long, J. Clin. Invest., 86:1387-1395, 1990.
    • Long, J. Clin. Invest., 95:881-887, 1995.
    • Malpe et al., J. Bone Min. Res., 12:423-430, 1997.
    • Mann et al., Cell, 33:153-159, 1983.
    • Marden et al., J. Craniofac. Surg., 1(3):154-160, 1990.
    • Marquardt et al., J. Biol. Chem., 262:12127-12131, 1987.
    • Massague et al., Trends Cell Biol., 4:172-178, 1994.
    • McCown et al., Brain Res., 713:99-107, 1996.
    • McGee-Russell, J. Histochem., 6:22-42, 1958.
    • Mella et al., Tetrahedron, 44:1673-1678, 1988.
    • Mendelsohn, Calcif Tissue Int 44:20-24, 1989.
    • Minns et al., Gastroenterology 127:119-26, 2004.
    • Mix et al., Mol Pharmacol 65:309-318, 2004.
    • Miyake et al., J. Craniofacial Gen. Dev. Biol., 16:32-47, 1996.
    • Miyazono et al., Adv. Immunol. 55:181-220, 1994.
    • Mizukami et al., Virology, 217:124-130, 1996.
    • Mohan, Growth Regulation 3:67-70, 1993.
    • Murray and Zweifel, Synthesis, 150-151, 1980.
    • Muzart, Tetrahedron Lett., 28:4665-4668, 1987.
    • Nicolas and Rubenstein, In: Vectors: A Survey of Molecular Cloning Vectors and Their Uses, Butterworth, Stoneham, 493-513, 1988.
    • Nicolau and Sene, Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 721:185-190, 1982.
    • Nicolau et al., Methods Enzymol., 149:157-176, 1987.
    • Nikol et al., J. Clin. Invest. 90:1582-1592, 1992.
    • Nishino et al., Cancer Res., 48:5210-5215, 1988.
    • Oberlender and Tuan, Cell Adhesion & Communication, 2:521-537, 1994.
    • Ohgushi et al., Acta Orthop. Scand. 60(3), 334-339, 1989.
    • Omura and Swern, Tetrahedron 1978, 34, 1651-1660.
    • Ono et al., Biomaterials 11(4), 265-271, 1990.
    • Padgett et al., Nature (London), 325:81-84, 1987.
    • Palcy et al., Biochem. J., 343:21-27, 1999.
    • Parsons et al., Ann NY Acad Sci. 523:190-207, 1988.
    • Paschalis et al., Bone 19:151-156, 1996.
    • Paskind et al., Virology, 67:242-248, 1975.
    • Passuti et al., Clin. Orthop. 248, 169-176, 1989.
    • Paul et al., Nature Biotechnol., 20:505-508, 2002.
    • Perales et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 91:4086-4090, 1994.
    • Ping et al., Microcirculation, 3:225-228, 1996.
    • Pinholt et al., J. Oral Maxillofac. Surg. 50(8), 859-867, 1992.
    • Pinholt et al., Scand. J. Dent. Res. 99(2), 154-161, 1991.
    • Place et al., Clin. Cancer Res., 9(7):2798-2806, 2003.
    • Plate et al., Nature 359:845-848, 1992.
    • Pochon et al., Z-Kinderchir. 41(3), 171-173, 1986.
    • Potter et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 81:7161-7165, 1984.
    • Prockop, J. Biol. Chem. 265:15349-15352, 1990.
    • Radler et al., Science, 275:810-814, 1997.
    • Renan, Radiother. Oncol., 19:197-218, 1990.
    • Rey, Connective Tiss Res 35:397-403, 1996.
    • Rey, J Bone Miner Res 10:1577-1588, 1995.
    • Richman et al., Endocrin 140:4699-4705, 1999.
    • Ridgeway, In: Vectors: A survey of molecular cloning vectors and their uses, Butterworth, Stoneham, 467-492, 1988.
    • Rinderknecht, FEBS Lett., 89:283, 1978b.
    • Rinderknecht, J. Biol. Chem., 253:2769, 1978a.
    • Rippe et al., Mol. Cell Biol., 10:689-695, 1990.
    • Roberts and Sporn, eds., The Transforming Growth Factors in Peptide Growth Factors and Their Receptors. I. Handbook of Experimental Pharmacology, vol. 95/I, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 419-472, 1990.
    • Robey and Termine, Calcif. Tissue Int., 37:453-460, 1985.
    • Roesgen, Unfallchirurgle, 16(5):258-265, 1990.
    • Roux et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 86:9079-9083, 1989.
    • Ruest et al., Syn. Comm., 6:169-174, 1976.
    • Sambrook et al., In: Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2d Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989.
    • Samulski et al., J. Virol., 61(10):3096-3101, 1987.
    • Sanger et al., Cancer 46:5629-5632, 1986.
    • Schweiki et al., Nature 359:843-845, 1992.
    • Sharples et al., DNA 6, 239-244, 1987.
    • Shull et al. Am. J. Pathol., 114(3):487-495, 1984.
    • Shull et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 86:5405-5410, 1989.
    • Sive et al., Mol. Pathol., 55(2):91-97, 2002.
    • Smith, Anal. Biochem., 150:76-85, 1985.
    • Sonogashira et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 4467-4470, 1975.
    • Sporn et al., Science, 233:532-534, 1986.
    • Sterzycki, R Synthesis, 724-725, 1979. String a et al., Exp. Cell Res., 232:287-294, 1997.
    • Suh et al., Cancer Res 63:1371-1376, 2003.
    • Suh et al., Cancer Res., 58:717-723, 1998.
    • Suh et al., Cancer Res., 59(2):336-341, 1999.
    • Syftestad et al., Differentiation, 29:230, 1985.
    • Sykes, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 72:1472-1480, 1976.
    • Temin, In: Gene Transfer, Plenum Press, New York, 149-188, 1986.
    • Ten Dijke et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci USA, 85:4715-4719, 1988.
    • Tenenbaum et al., Calcif. Tissue Int., 34:76, 1982.
    • Thomas et al., Endocrinology 140:5036-5044, 1999.
    • Tibbetts Cell, 12:243-249, 1977.
    • Toriumi et al., Arch. Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg., 117:1101-1112, 1991.
    • Towbin, Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 76:4350-4354, 1979.
    • Tsai et al., Cancer Res., 50:152-161, 1990.
    • Tur-Kaspa et al., Mol. Cell Biol., 6:716-718, 1986.
    • Turksen et al., J Histochem Cytochem, 40:1339-1352, 1992.
    • Vukicevic et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 86:8793, 1989.
    • Wade et al., In: Organometallic Polymers, Academic Press, New York, 283-288, 1978.
    • Wagner et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 87(9):3410-3414, 1990.
    • Walsh et al., J Bone Miner Res., 9:1687-1696, 1994.
    • Watt et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA, 83(2): 3166-3170, 1986.
    • Weeks and Melton, Cell, 51:861-867, 1987.
    • White et al., J. Virol., 73(4):2832-40, 1999.
    • Wong and Tuan, Dev. Biol., 167:130-147, 1995.
    • Wong et al., Gene, 10:87-94, 1980.
    • Woodward and Tuan, Dev. Gen., 24:178-187, 1999.
    • Wozney, In: Cellular and Molecular Biology of Bone, Academic Press, 131-167, 1993.
    • Wrana et al., Nature, 370:341-347, 1994.
    • Wu and Wu, Adv. Drug Delivery Rev., 12:159-167, 1993.
    • Wu and Wu, Biochem., 27:887-892, 1988.
    • Wu and Wu, J. Biol. Chem., 262:4429-4432, 1987.
    • Xiao et al., J. Virol., 70:8098-8108, 1996.
    • Yang et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci USA, 87:9568-9572, 1990.
    • Zambonin et al., Acta Orthop. Scand., 70:217-220, 1999.

Claims (14)

1-64. (canceled)
65. A three-dimensional matrix comprising a matrix material and a compound having the structure:
Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00040
wherein,
R2 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C6-C15-aryl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C1-C15-heteroaryl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-aryl amino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroaryl amino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido;
R7 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-aryl amino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroaryl amino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido, or
a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or tautomer thereof.
66. The three-dimensional matrix of claim 65, wherein the three-dimensional matrix comprises an orthopedic implant, interface, artificial joint, or dental implant.
67. The three-dimensional matrix of claim 66, wherein the compound is coated on the surface of the orthopedic implant, interface or artificial joint.
68. The three-dimensional matrix of claim 65, further comprising a bone-producing, cartilage-producing or osteochondrogenic cell.
69. The three-dimensional matrix of claim 65, wherein the matrix material comprises an alginate gel, collagen gel, fibrin gel, polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid, poly(lactide-co-glycolide), hydroxyapatite, devitalized animal bone, devitalized human bone, or a porous ceramic structure.
70. The three-dimensional matrix of claim 65, further comprising a bone or cartilage growth factor.
71. A hydrogel comprising an organic polymer and a compound having the structure:
Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00041
wherein,
R2 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C6-C15-aryl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C1-C15-heteroaryl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-aryl amino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroaryl amino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido;
R7 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-aryl amino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroaryl amino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido, or
a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or tautomer thereof.
72. The hydrogel of claim 71, further comprising a bone-producing, cartilage-producing or osteochondrogenic cell.
73. The hydrogel of claim 71, wherein the polymer comprises a polysaccharide, polyphosphazene, polyacrylate, block copolymer, or protein.
74. The hydrogel of claim 71, further comprising a bone or cartilage growth factor.
75. A medium for ex vivo culturing of bone and cartilage cells comprising a serum free culture medium that supports growth and differentiation of a bone-producing, cartilage-producing or osteochondrogenic cell and a compound having the structure:
Figure US20130122053A1-20130516-C00042
wherein,
R2 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C6-C15-aryl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C1-C15-heteroaryl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-aryl amino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroaryl amino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido;
R7 is —H, hydroxy, amino, cyano, halo, or substituted or unsubstituted versions of C1-C15-alkyl, C2-C15-alkenyl, C2-C15-alkynyl, C7-C15-aralkyl, C2-C15-heteroaralkyl, C1-C15-acyl, C1-C15-alkoxy, C2-C15-alkenyloxy, C2-C15-alkynyloxy, C6-C15-aryloxy, C7-C15-aralkoxy, C1-C15-heteroaryloxy, C2-C15-heteroaralkoxy, C1-C15-acyloxy, C1-C15-alkylamino, C2-C15-alkenylamino, C2-C15-alkynylamino, C6-C15-aryl amino, C7-C15-aralkylamino, C1-C15-heteroaryl amino, C2-C15-heteroaralkylamino, or C2-C15-amido, or
a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or tautomer thereof.
76. The medium of claim 75, further comprising one or more of albumin, a soluble carrier-fatty acid complex, an iron source, or insulin growth factor.
77. The medium of claim 75, further comprising a bone or cartilage growth factor.
US13/625,527 2006-11-17 2012-09-24 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth Abandoned US20130122053A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/625,527 US20130122053A1 (en) 2006-11-17 2012-09-24 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US86634406P 2006-11-17 2006-11-17
US11/941,723 US8299046B2 (en) 2006-11-17 2007-11-16 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth
US13/625,527 US20130122053A1 (en) 2006-11-17 2012-09-24 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/941,723 Continuation US8299046B2 (en) 2006-11-17 2007-11-16 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20130122053A1 true US20130122053A1 (en) 2013-05-16

Family

ID=39400922

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/941,723 Active 2028-06-12 US8299046B2 (en) 2006-11-17 2007-11-16 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth
US13/625,527 Abandoned US20130122053A1 (en) 2006-11-17 2012-09-24 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/941,723 Active 2028-06-12 US8299046B2 (en) 2006-11-17 2007-11-16 Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US8299046B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2008064132A2 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9290455B2 (en) 2014-02-11 2016-03-22 Trustees Of Dartmouth College CDDO-Me amino acid conjugates and methods of use
US11059792B2 (en) 2015-02-12 2021-07-13 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Imidazolyl tricyclic enones as antioxidant inflammation modulators
US11292781B2 (en) 2016-12-16 2022-04-05 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyrimidine tricyclic enone derivatives for inhibition of ROR-gamma and other uses

Families Citing this family (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6326507B1 (en) 1998-06-19 2001-12-04 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Therapeutic compounds and methods of use
US7435755B2 (en) * 2000-11-28 2008-10-14 The Trustees Of Dartmouth College CDDO-compounds and combination therapies thereof
JP2010510243A (en) * 2006-11-17 2010-04-02 トラスティーズ オブ ダートマス カレッジ Synthesis and biological activity of tricyclic-bis-enone (TBE)
US8921340B2 (en) * 2006-11-17 2014-12-30 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Methods for using synthetic triterpenoids in the treatment of bone or cartilage diseases or conditions
WO2009023845A2 (en) * 2007-08-15 2009-02-19 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Combination therapy with synthetic triterpenoids and gemcitabine
WO2009058849A1 (en) 2007-10-29 2009-05-07 University Of Rochester Use of electrophilic compounds for inducing platelet production or maintaining platelet function
MY158798A (en) 2008-01-11 2016-11-15 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc Synthetic triterpenoids and methods of use in the treatment of disease
TW201004627A (en) * 2008-04-18 2010-02-01 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc Antioxidant inflammation modulators: novel derivatives of oleanolic acid
NZ588711A (en) 2008-04-18 2012-10-26 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc C-17 homologated oleanolic acid derivatives for treating cancer
PT2276493T (en) 2008-04-18 2019-01-10 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc Antioxidant inflammation modulators: oleanolic acid derivatives with amino and other modifications at c-17
CA2721665C (en) * 2008-04-18 2017-01-24 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds including an anti-inflammatory pharmacore and methods of use
JP5529850B2 (en) 2008-04-18 2014-06-25 リアタ ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Antioxidant inflammation modulator: oleanolic acid derivative with saturation in C ring
CA2731650A1 (en) 2008-07-22 2010-01-28 Tadashi Honda Monocyclic cyanoenones and methods of use thereof
EP2335744A4 (en) * 2008-08-26 2011-07-27 Univ Hokkaido Nat Univ Corp Bone-filling type agent for inducing cartilage regeneration
WO2010053817A1 (en) * 2008-11-04 2010-05-14 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Betulinic acid derivatives and methods of use thereof
EP2558105B1 (en) 2010-04-12 2019-11-20 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bardoxolone methyl for the treatment of obesity
US8614190B2 (en) 2010-06-30 2013-12-24 Industrial Technology Research Institute Thermal responsive composition for treating bone diseases
SG191181A1 (en) 2010-12-17 2013-07-31 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc Pyrazolyl and pyrimidinyl tricyclic enones as antioxidant inflammation modulators
ME03469B (en) 2011-03-11 2020-01-20 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc C4-monomethyl triterpenoid derivatives and methods of use thereof
EP2686027B1 (en) * 2011-03-16 2021-05-05 Kuros Biosurgery AG Pharmaceutical formulation for use in spinal fusion
WO2013163344A1 (en) 2012-04-27 2013-10-31 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2.2-difluoropropionamide derivatives of bardoxolone methyl, polymorphic forms and methods of use thereof
US8981144B2 (en) 2012-05-08 2015-03-17 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Method for synthesizing 2-cyano-3,12-dioxoolean-1, 9(11)-dien-28-oic acid methyl ester and derivatives thereof
US8921419B2 (en) 2012-05-08 2014-12-30 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Triterpenoids and compositions containing the same
WO2013188818A1 (en) 2012-06-15 2013-12-19 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. A-ring epoxidized triterpenoid-based anti-inflammation modulators and methods of use thereof
SG11201501792RA (en) 2012-09-10 2015-05-28 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc C17-alkanediyl and alkenediyl derivatives of oleanolic acid and methods of use thereof
WO2014040073A1 (en) 2012-09-10 2014-03-13 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. C13-hydroxy derivatives of oleanolic acid and methods of use thereof
US9512094B2 (en) 2012-09-10 2016-12-06 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. C17-heteroaryl derivatives of oleanolic acid and methods of use thereof
WO2014151181A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2014-09-25 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York A novel method for synthesizing tbe-31
TWI649330B (en) 2013-04-24 2019-02-01 艾伯維有限公司 2,2-difluoropropionamide derivative of methyl bardoxolone, polymorph thereof and use thereof
US9896475B2 (en) 2014-08-26 2018-02-20 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Pyridyl analogs of 1-(2-cyano-3,12-dioxooleana-1,9(11)dien-28-oyl) imidazole
US10189791B2 (en) 2014-08-26 2019-01-29 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Pyridyl analogs of 1-(2-cyano-3,12-dioxooleana-1,9(11)dien-28-oyl) imidazole
CA2974941C (en) * 2015-02-06 2021-11-23 Kolon Life Science, Inc. Composition for treating inflammatory diseases induced by hyperimmune response
US10233146B2 (en) 2015-04-16 2019-03-19 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Acetylenic cyanoenones as therapeutics for inflammation and carcinogenesis
AU2016326704B2 (en) 2015-09-23 2021-01-28 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. C4-modified oleanolic acid derivatives for inhibition of IL-17 and other uses
EP3538104A1 (en) 2016-11-08 2019-09-18 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating alport syndrome using bardoxolone methyl or analogs thereof

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4097935A (en) * 1976-07-21 1978-07-04 Sterling Drug Inc. Hydroxylapatite ceramic
US20030119732A1 (en) * 2000-11-28 2003-06-26 Board Of CDDO-compounds and combination therapies thereof
US6730314B2 (en) * 2000-08-29 2004-05-04 Merck Patent Gesellschaft Culturing encapsulated chondrocytes under reduced oxygen partial pressure to produce cartilage implants
WO2005042002A2 (en) * 2003-10-30 2005-05-12 Entelos, Inc. Treatment of rhematoid arthritis with flip antagonists

Family Cites Families (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4395423A (en) * 1978-10-10 1983-07-26 Sterling Drug Inc. Polycyclic cyanoketones
US4526988A (en) * 1983-03-10 1985-07-02 Eli Lilly And Company Difluoro antivirals and intermediate therefor
IL77133A (en) * 1984-12-04 1991-01-31 Lilly Co Eli Antineoplastic pharmaceutical compositions containing pentofuranoside derivatives,some new such compounds and their preparation
US5013649A (en) * 1986-07-01 1991-05-07 Genetics Institute, Inc. DNA sequences encoding osteoinductive products
PT86377B (en) 1986-12-24 1990-11-20 Lilly Co Eli METHOD FOR PREPARING IMMUNOGLOBULIN CONJUGATES WITH A ACIDED DIFLUORONUCLEOSIDEO
CA1312599C (en) 1988-02-16 1993-01-12 Larry Wayne Hertel 2',3'dideoxy-2',2'difluoronucleosides
US5064823A (en) * 1988-08-24 1991-11-12 Research Triangle Institute Pentacyclic triterpenoid compounds as topoisomerase inhibitors or cell differentiation inducers
CA2004695C (en) 1988-12-12 1999-08-10 Rosanne Bonjouklian Phospholipid nucleosides
EP0523110A1 (en) 1990-04-04 1993-01-20 Nycomed Imaging As Nucleoside derivatives
SE502569C2 (en) * 1991-05-31 1995-11-13 British Tech Group Use of an immunologically inert matrix of a sterol and saponins which can form spherical nanoparticles of narrow size distribution such as drug carriers, particles, composition and kits
US5426183A (en) * 1992-06-22 1995-06-20 Eli Lilly And Company Catalytic stereoselective glycosylation process for preparing 2'-deoxy-2',2'-difluoronucleosides and 2'-deoxy-2'-fluoronucleosides
YU43193A (en) 1992-06-22 1997-01-08 Eli Lilly And Company 2'-DEOXY-2 ', 2'-DIFLUORO (4-SUBSTITUTED) PYRIMIDINE NUCLEOSIDS OF ANTIVIRUS AND ANTICANCEROGENIC ACTIVITY AND INTERMEDIATES
US5606048A (en) * 1992-06-22 1997-02-25 Eli Lilly And Company Stereoselective glycosylation process for preparing 2'-Deoxy-2', 2'-difluoronucleosides and 2'-deoxy-2'-fluoronucleosides
US5401838A (en) * 1992-06-22 1995-03-28 Eli Lilly And Company Stereoselective fusion glycosylation process for preparing 2'-deoxy-2',2'-difluoronucleosides and 2'-deoxy-2'-fluoronucleosides
US5594124A (en) * 1992-06-22 1997-01-14 Eli Lilly And Company Stereoselective glycosylation process for preparing 2'-Deoxy-2',2'-difluoropyrimidine nucleosides and 2'-deoxy-2'-fluoropyrimidine nucleosides and intermediates thereof
UA41261C2 (en) 1992-06-22 2001-09-17 Елі Ліллі Енд Компані METHOD OF OBTAINING BETA-ANOMER-ENRICHED NUCLEOSIDES
DE4308042C2 (en) 1993-03-13 2000-10-12 Alstom Energy Syst Gmbh Roller mill
US6025395A (en) * 1994-04-15 2000-02-15 Duke University Method of preventing or delaying the onset and progression of Alzheimer's disease and related disorders
US5972703A (en) * 1994-08-12 1999-10-26 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Bone precursor cells: compositions and methods
US5521294A (en) * 1995-01-18 1996-05-28 Eli Lilly And Company 2,2-difluoro-3-carbamoyl ribose sulfonate compounds and process for the preparation of beta nucleosides
DE69724964T2 (en) 1996-07-03 2004-07-22 Pharmacia & Upjohn Co., Kalamazoo TARGETED DRUG DELIVERY FOR ZULPHONAMIDE DERIVATIVES
ATE236188T1 (en) 1997-01-24 2003-04-15 Conpharma As GEMCITABINE DERIVATIVES
US20050276836A1 (en) * 1997-06-11 2005-12-15 Michelle Wilson Coated vaginal devices for vaginal delivery of therapeutically effective and/or health-promoting agents
US5965119A (en) 1997-12-30 1999-10-12 Enzon, Inc. Trialkyl-lock-facilitated polymeric prodrugs of amino-containing bioactive agents
US6326507B1 (en) * 1998-06-19 2001-12-04 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Therapeutic compounds and methods of use
US6485756B1 (en) * 1999-04-06 2002-11-26 Collaborative Technologies, Inc. Stable, homogeneous natural product extracts containing polar and apolar fractions
BR0011522A (en) 1999-05-14 2002-06-04 Nereus Pharmaceuticals Inc Compound and synthesis method for the manufacture of the compound
CA2341263C (en) 1999-06-25 2006-08-01 Roche Diagnostics Corporation Enzyme inhibition immunoassay
AU784304B2 (en) 1999-10-20 2006-03-09 Osteoscreen, Inc. Inhibitors of proteasomal activity for stimulating bone growth
WO2002003996A1 (en) 2000-07-12 2002-01-17 RAJKUMAR, Sujatha Use of dammarane-type tritepenoid saporins
CA2430454A1 (en) 2000-11-28 2002-06-20 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Cddo-compounds and combination therapies thereof
JP2005514359A (en) 2001-11-23 2005-05-19 中外製薬株式会社 Identification of tumor-targeting enzymes
US7176237B2 (en) * 2002-01-15 2007-02-13 The Trustees Of Dartmouth College Tricyclic-bis-enone derivatives and methods of use thereof
CA2485565A1 (en) * 2002-05-13 2004-08-05 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Inhibitors and methods of use thereof
AU2003291726A1 (en) * 2002-11-04 2004-06-07 Xenoport, Inc. Gemcitabine prodrugs, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US8288439B2 (en) 2003-11-04 2012-10-16 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Methods and compositions for the inhibition of HIV-1 replication
CA2579231C (en) 2004-09-07 2018-07-10 Pacific Arrow Limited Anti-tumor compounds with angeloyl groups
EP1959969A2 (en) 2005-07-01 2008-08-27 The Johns Hopkins University Compositions and methods for the treatment or prevention of disorders relating to oxidative stress
DE102005041613A1 (en) 2005-09-01 2007-03-08 Ergonex Pharma Gmbh Use of octahydro-indolo-quinoline compound in the preparation of pharmaceutical composition for the treatment and prophylaxis of gastrointestinal and endocardial disease and carcinoid syndrome
EP1960790B1 (en) 2005-12-12 2016-12-28 MosaMedix B.V. Annexin derivatives suitable for pretargeting in therapy and diagnosis
JP2010510243A (en) * 2006-11-17 2010-04-02 トラスティーズ オブ ダートマス カレッジ Synthesis and biological activity of tricyclic-bis-enone (TBE)
WO2008111497A1 (en) 2007-03-08 2008-09-18 Santen Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Prophylactic or therapeutic agent for ophthalmic disease associated with oxidative stress, comprising triterpenoid as active ingredient
WO2008136838A1 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-13 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Novel amide derivatives of cddo and methods of use thereof
US8088824B2 (en) 2007-08-15 2012-01-03 Reata Pharmaceuticals Inc. Forms of CDDO methyl ester
WO2009023845A2 (en) * 2007-08-15 2009-02-19 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Combination therapy with synthetic triterpenoids and gemcitabine

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4097935A (en) * 1976-07-21 1978-07-04 Sterling Drug Inc. Hydroxylapatite ceramic
US6730314B2 (en) * 2000-08-29 2004-05-04 Merck Patent Gesellschaft Culturing encapsulated chondrocytes under reduced oxygen partial pressure to produce cartilage implants
US20030119732A1 (en) * 2000-11-28 2003-06-26 Board Of CDDO-compounds and combination therapies thereof
WO2005042002A2 (en) * 2003-10-30 2005-05-12 Entelos, Inc. Treatment of rhematoid arthritis with flip antagonists

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Elliot et. al. (Arthritis Res. Ther. (2003) 5:R285-R291). *
Elliot et. al. (Arthritis Research (2003) 5:R285-R291). *
Leach et. al. (Expert Opin. Biol. Ther. (2004) 4:1015-1027). *
Niikura et. al. (Osteoarthritis and Cartilage 14:S112-S113 (2006). *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9290455B2 (en) 2014-02-11 2016-03-22 Trustees Of Dartmouth College CDDO-Me amino acid conjugates and methods of use
US11059792B2 (en) 2015-02-12 2021-07-13 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Imidazolyl tricyclic enones as antioxidant inflammation modulators
US11292781B2 (en) 2016-12-16 2022-04-05 Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyrimidine tricyclic enone derivatives for inhibition of ROR-gamma and other uses

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2008064132A2 (en) 2008-05-29
US20080233195A1 (en) 2008-09-25
WO2008064132A3 (en) 2009-08-13
US8299046B2 (en) 2012-10-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8299046B2 (en) Synthetic triterpenoids and tricyclic-bis-enones for use in stimulating bone and cartilage growth
Mansour et al. Osteoclast activity modulates B-cell development in the bone marrow
Lee et al. Systemic transplantation of human adipose‐derived stem cells stimulates bone repair by promoting osteoblast and osteoclast function
Nimura et al. Increased proliferation of human synovial mesenchymal stem cells with autologous human serum: comparisons with bone marrow mesenchymal stem cells and with fetal bovine serum
Liao et al. IL‐17 alters the mesenchymal stem cell niche towards osteogenesis in cooperation with osteocytes
Jimi et al. Interleukin 1 induces multinucleation and bone-resorbing activity of osteoclasts in the absence of osteoblasts/stromal cells
Portron et al. Effects of in vitro low oxygen tension preconditioning of adipose stromal cells on their in vivo chondrogenic potential: application in cartilage tissue repair
Scutt et al. Cannabinoids stimulate fibroblastic colony formation by bone marrow cells indirectly via CB 2 receptors
Sidney et al. Comparison of osteogenic differentiation of embryonic stem cells and primary osteoblasts revealed by responses to IL-1β, TNF-α, and IFN-γ
Mikami et al. Current status of drug therapies for osteoporosis and the search for stem cells adapted for bone regenerative medicine
Açil et al. Isolation, characterization and investigation of differentiation potential of human periodontal ligament cells and dental follicle progenitor cells and their response to BMP-7 in vitro
JP2016106098A (en) Compounds and methods for treating bone disorders and controlling weight
Hsu et al. The effect of exogenous histone H1 on rat adipose‐derived stem cell proliferation, migration, and osteogenic differentiation in vitro
WO2016193175A1 (en) Compositions for treatment of osteochondral disorders
KR101819827B1 (en) Composition for preventing or treating osteoarthritis comprising mesenchymal stem cell treated STAT3 inhibitor
US20040138285A1 (en) Chondrogenesis promoters
Liu et al. Impact of marine-based biomaterials on the immunoregulatory properties of bone marrow-derived mesenchymal stem cells: potential use of fish collagen in bone tissue engineering
Ying et al. Phosphoserine promotes osteogenic differentiation of human adipose stromal cells through bone morphogenetic protein signalling
JP2001503446A (en) Piperazine derivatives for treating bone deficiency
KR101520531B1 (en) Method of producing parathyroid hormone from tonsil-derived mesenchymal stem cell
US20210147482A1 (en) Peptide for inhibiting bone resorption
KR101794503B1 (en) Composition containing ganglioside GM3 for inducing chondrogenic differentiation, and uses thereof
AU2007253796A1 (en) Use of Cathepsin K antagonists in bone production
US20120213826A1 (en) Use of Pro-Inflammatory Compounds for Promoting Bone Formation
Wallmichrath et al. Epidermal growth factor (EGF) transfection of human bone marrow stromal cells in bone tissue engineering

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: OSTEOSCREEN INC., TEXAS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:MUNDY, GREGORY;GARRETT, ROSS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20080414 TO 20080606;REEL/FRAME:029960/0793

Owner name: THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, CALIF

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:REDDI, HARI;NIIKURA, TAKAHIRO;REEL/FRAME:029960/0856

Effective date: 20080528

Owner name: TRUSTEES OF DARTMOUTH COLLEGE, NEW HAMPSHIRE

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:SPORN, MICHAEL B.;LIBY, KAREN T.;HONDA, TADASHI;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20080307 TO 20080404;REEL/FRAME:029960/0720

AS Assignment

Owner name: RUTGERS, THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF NEW JERSEY, NEW J

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SUH, NANJOO;REEL/FRAME:037010/0220

Effective date: 20151105

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONMENT FOR FAILURE TO CORRECT DRAWINGS/OATH/NONPUB REQUEST

AS Assignment

Owner name: NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH - DIRECTOR DEITR, MA

Free format text: CONFIRMATORY LICENSE;ASSIGNOR:TRUSTEES OF DARTMOUTH COLLEGE;REEL/FRAME:049210/0174

Effective date: 20190515

AS Assignment

Owner name: NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT, MARYLAND

Free format text: CONFIRMATORY LICENSE;ASSIGNOR:DARTMOUTH COLLEGE;REEL/FRAME:053311/0974

Effective date: 20190125